HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/
3800/CP3505 Series Printer
Service Manual
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800/
CP3505 Series Printer
Service Manual
Copyright and license
© 2007 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 6/2007
Part number Q5982-91034
Trademark credits
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S.
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds.
PostScript® is a trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Energy Star® and the Energy Star® logo are U.S. registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.
Table of contents
1 Product information
Quick access to printer information ....................................................................................................... 2
Printers at a glance ................................................................................................................................ 3
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer ................................................................................. 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer ................................................................................. 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer ................................................................................. 4
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer ............................................................................ 5
Features at a glance .............................................................................................................................. 6
Walkaround ............................................................................................................................................ 8
Control-panel overview ........................................................................................................................ 10
Control-panel indicator lights .............................................................................................. 11
Display ................................................................................................................................ 11
Printer software .................................................................................................................................... 13
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer, HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer, and
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer drivers .............................................................. 13
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer drivers ................................................................... 14
Additional drivers ................................................................................................................ 15
Software for networks ......................................................................................................... 15
HP Web Jetadmin .............................................................................................. 15
UNIX ................................................................................................................... 15
Linux ................................................................................................................... 15
Utilities ................................................................................................................................. 16
HP Easy Printer Care Software ......................................................................... 16
Embedded Web server ...................................................................................... 16
Other components and utilities .......................................................................... 16
Print-media specifications .................................................................................................................... 17
Supported paper and print media sizes .............................................................................. 17
Media type and tray loading ................................................................................................ 18
2 Installation and configuration
What is in the box ................................................................................................................................ 22
Site requirements ................................................................................................................................ 23
Physical specifications ........................................................................................................ 23
Connecting to a network or a computer .............................................................................................. 24
Printer memory .................................................................................................................................... 26
Installing memory DIMMs ................................................................................................... 26
To install memory DIMMs .................................................................................. 26
Enabling memory ............................................................................................... 29
To enable memory for Windows ....................................................... 29
ENWW iii
Checking DIMM installation ............................................................................... 29
To check DIMM installation ............................................................... 29
3 Maintenance
Understanding approximate supplies-replacement intervals .............................................................. 32
Replacing supplies .............................................................................................................................. 33
Locating supplies ................................................................................................................ 33
Supply replacement guidelines ........................................................................................... 33
Managing the print cartridge ................................................................................................................ 34
HP print cartridges .............................................................................................................. 34
Non-HP print cartridges ...................................................................................................... 34
Print-cartridge authentication .............................................................................................. 34
Print-cartridge storage ........................................................................................................ 34
Print-cartridge life expectancy ............................................................................................ 34
Checking the supply level ................................................................................................... 35
Using the control panel ...................................................................................... 35
Using the embedded Web server ...................................................................... 35
Using HP Web Jetadmin .................................................................................... 35
Replacing print cartridges .................................................................................. 35
To replace the print cartridge ............................................................ 36
Cleaning the printer ............................................................................................................................. 38
Cleaning spilled toner ......................................................................................................... 38
Vacuum specifications ....................................................................................... 38
Calibrating the printer .......................................................................................................................... 39
Tools for troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 40
Using printer information pages .......................................................................................... 40
Configuring e-mail alerts ..................................................................................................... 41
Using the embedded Web server ....................................................................................... 41
To open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ................ 42
Embedded Web server sections ........................................................................ 43
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software .......................................................................... 44
Supported operating systems ............................................................................ 44
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software ....................................................... 45
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections ........................................................... 45
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh .......................................................................... 46
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2 ............................................. 46
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 ............................................. 46
HP Printer Utility features ................................................................................... 46
4 Theory of operation
Engine control system ......................................................................................................................... 50
Power-on sequence ............................................................................................................ 51
Motors, fans, and solenoids ................................................................................................ 52
Laser/scanner system ......................................................................................................................... 54
Pickup-and-feed-system ...................................................................................................................... 55
Sensors in the pickup-and-feed system trays (cassettes) .................................................. 56
Cassette pickup mechanism ............................................................................................... 57
Multipurpose-tray pickup mechanism ................................................................................. 58
Feed-speed control ............................................................................................................. 58
Sensor jam detection .......................................................................................................... 60
iv ENWW
Image-formation system ...................................................................................................................... 63
Image-formation process .................................................................................................... 64
Latent-image formation stage ............................................................................................. 65
Step 1: pre-exposure .......................................................................................... 65
Step 2: primary charging .................................................................................... 66
Step 3: laser-beam exposure ............................................................................. 66
Developing stage ................................................................................................................ 66
Step 4: developing ............................................................................................. 66
Transfer stage ..................................................................................................................... 66
Step 5: media feed ............................................................................................. 67
Step 6: image transfer ........................................................................................ 67
Step 7: separation from the drum ...................................................................... 67
Step 8: separation from the ETB ........................................................................ 68
Fusing stage ....................................................................................................................... 68
Step 9: fusing ..................................................................................................... 68
Cleaning stage .................................................................................................................... 68
Step 10: drum cleaning ...................................................................................... 69
Print cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 69
Print-cartridge activation ..................................................................................................... 70
5 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement strategy ..................................................................................................... 72
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 72
Required tools ..................................................................................................................... 73
Types of screws .................................................................................................................. 74
Service approach ................................................................................................................ 75
Before performing service ................................................................................................... 75
After performing service ...................................................................................................... 75
Print cartridges .................................................................................................................... 76
External doors, covers, and panels ..................................................................................................... 77
Front cover .......................................................................................................................... 77
Upper cover (fuser door) ..................................................................................................... 82
Rear lower cover ................................................................................................................. 85
Left cover ............................................................................................................................ 86
Right cover .......................................................................................................................... 89
Rear upper cover ................................................................................................................ 93
Internal assemblies .............................................................................................................................. 94
Formatter cage .................................................................................................................... 94
Electrostatic transfer belt (ETB) .......................................................................................... 96
Fuser ................................................................................................................................... 97
Duplex fan ........................................................................................................................... 98
Print-cartridge drive motors .............................................................................................. 101
Duplex-reverse-drive assembly ........................................................................................ 102
Duplex-feed-drive assembly ............................................................................................. 105
Fuser drive assembly ........................................................................................................ 107
Developing separation-drive assembly ............................................................................. 110
Pickup-and-feed assembly ............................................................................................... 113
Pickup-drive assembly ...................................................................................................... 119
Laser/scanner assembly ................................................................................................... 128
Main fan ............................................................................................................................ 132
ENWW v
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) ..................................................................................................... 134
Low-voltage power-supply PCA ........................................................................................ 134
DC controller PCA ............................................................................................................. 138
High-voltage power supply ............................................................................................... 140
Memory-controller PCA .................................................................................................... 142
Driver PCA ........................................................................................................................ 144
Control panel ..................................................................................................................... 146
Pickup-and-feed driver PCA ............................................................................................. 148
Duplex-driver PCA ............................................................................................................ 150
Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 152
Cassette media sensor (HP LaserJet 3600/3800/CP3505) ............................................. 152
Temperature sensor ......................................................................................................... 154
Paper and registration sensor covers ............................................................................... 155
Cartridge-sensor PCA ....................................................................................................... 156
500-sheet feeder ............................................................................................................................... 159
500-sheet feeder right cover ............................................................................................. 159
500-sheet feeder left cover ............................................................................................... 161
500-sheet feeder rear cover ............................................................................................. 164
500-sheet feeder driver PCA ............................................................................................ 166
Media sensor (500-sheet feeder) ..................................................................................... 168
6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting process ................................................................................................................... 172
Pre-troubleshooting checklist ............................................................................................ 172
Troubleshooting flowchart ................................................................................................. 174
Power-on checks .............................................................................................................. 175
Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................... 176
Jams .................................................................................................................................................. 200
Jam recovery .................................................................................................................... 200
Avoiding jams .................................................................................................................... 201
Clearing jams .................................................................................................................... 202
Image-formation troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 212
Print-quality problems associated with media .................................................. 212
Defects on overhead transparencies ................................................................................ 213
Print-quality problems that are related to the environment .............................................. 214
Print-quality problems that are related to jams ................................................................. 214
Print-quality problems from toner buildup ......................................................................... 214
Print-quality troubleshooting pages .................................................................................. 214
Image defects .................................................................................................................................... 215
Light image ....................................................................................................................... 216
Light color ......................................................................................................................... 216
Dark image ........................................................................................................................ 217
Dark color .......................................................................................................................... 218
Completely blank image ................................................................................................... 218
All black or solid color ....................................................................................................... 218
Dots in vertical lines .......................................................................................................... 218
Dirt on back of paper ........................................................................................................ 219
Dirt on front of paper ......................................................................................................... 219
Vertical lines ..................................................................................................................... 220
White vertical lines ............................................................................................................ 220
vi ENWW
ENWW
Horizontal line ................................................................................................................... 220
White horizontal line ......................................................................................................... 221
Color missing .................................................................................................................... 221
Blank spots ....................................................................................................................... 222
Poor fusing ........................................................................................................................ 222
Image distortion ................................................................................................................ 222
Color misregistration ......................................................................................................... 223
Smearing ........................................................................................................................... 223
Misplaced image ............................................................................................................... 224
Reversed color .................................................................................................................. 224
Snail tracks ....................................................................................................................... 224
Repetitive-defects troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 225
Interface troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 227
Communication checks ..................................................................................................... 227
EIO troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 227
Service menu ..................................................................................................................................... 228
Using the Service menu .................................................................................................... 228
Clear event log .................................................................................................................. 228
Total page count ............................................................................................................... 228
Serial number .................................................................................................................... 228
Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................................. 229
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ 230
LED diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 230
Diagnostics mode ............................................................................................................. 230
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode ................. 231
Diagnostic tests ................................................................................................................. 231
Individual diagnostic tests ................................................................................................. 232
Print the event log page ................................................................................... 232
View the event log on the control-panel display .............................................. 232
Print the print-quality (PQ) troubleshooting pages ........................................... 233
Disable cartridge check (special mode test) .................................................... 233
Paper-path sensor test ..................................................................................... 233
Paper-path test ................................................................................................. 233
Manual sensor test (special mode test) ........................................................... 234
Component test (special mode test) ................................................................ 235
Print/Stop test ................................................................................................... 237
Test pages ......................................................................................................................................... 238
Engine test page ............................................................................................................... 238
Formatter test .................................................................................................................... 238
Half-self test ...................................................................................................................... 238
Drum-rotation test ............................................................................................................. 239
Engine resets ..................................................................................................................................... 240
Engine resets .................................................................................................................... 240
Cold reset ......................................................................................................... 240
NVRAM initialization ......................................................................................... 240
Hard-disk initialization ...................................................................................... 241
Service ID .......................................................................................................................................... 242
Converting the Service ID to an actual date ..................................................................... 242
Restoring the Service ID ................................................................................................... 242
Troubleshooting diagrams ................................................................................................ 243
vii
Connector locations ......................................................................................... 243
Major assemblies ............................................................................................. 245
DC controller connectors ................................................................................. 250
Timing diagram ................................................................................................ 251
Circuit diagrams ............................................................................................... 253
7 Parts and diagrams
Ordering parts and supplies .............................................................................................................. 258
Parts .................................................................................................................................. 258
How to use the parts lists and diagrams ........................................................................... 258
Types of screws ................................................................................................................ 258
Related documentation and software ............................................................................... 259
Accessories and supplies ................................................................................................. 259
External panels and covers ............................................................................................................... 264
Internal components .......................................................................................................................... 272
Paper-pickup drive assembly ............................................................................................................ 282
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models) .............................................................................. 284
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) ......................................................................... 286
Developing separation-drive assembly ............................................................................................. 288
Fuser drive assembly ........................................................................................................................ 290
Cassette (tray 2) ................................................................................................................................ 292
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) ..................................................................... 294
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000) ............................................................................................ 296
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models) .......................................................................................... 298
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models) ............................................................................................ 300
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1) .................................................................................................. 302
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models) .................................................................................. 304
Fuser .................................................................................................................................................. 306
PCAs .................................................................................................................................................. 308
500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3) .................................................................................................... 310
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly ......................................................................................... 312
500-sheet feeder PCA ....................................................................................................................... 314
Alphabetical parts list ......................................................................................................................... 316
Numerical parts list ............................................................................................................................ 326
Appendix A Printer specifications
Electrical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 338
Power-consumption specifications .................................................................................................... 339
Acoustic specifications ...................................................................................................................... 340
Operating-environment specifications ............................................................................................... 341
Appendix B Product warranty statements
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement .................................................................................. 344
Availability of support and service ..................................................................................................... 345
HP maintenance agreements ............................................................................................................ 345
Next-Day Onsite Service .................................................................................................. 345
Appendix C Regulatory statements
FCC regulations ................................................................................................................................. 348
viii ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer) .................................................. 349
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series and HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer) ............................................................................................................................................... 350
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer) ............................................. 351
Safety statements .............................................................................................................................. 352
Laser safety ...................................................................................................................... 352
Canadian DOC regulations ............................................................................................... 352
EMI statement (Korea) ...................................................................................................... 352
VCCI statement (Japan) ................................................................................................... 352
Power cord statement (Japan) .......................................................................................... 352
Laser statement for Finland .............................................................................................. 353
Index .................................................................................................................................................................. 355
ENWW ix
x ENWW
1 Product information
●
Quick access to printer information
●
Printers at a glance
●
Features at a glance
●
Walkaround
●
Control-panel overview
●
Printer software
●
Print-media specifications
ENWW 1
Quick access to printer information
Several references are available for use with this printer.
● HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer: www.hp.com/support/clj3000 .
● HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer: www.hp.com/support/clj3600 .
● HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer: www.hp.com/support/clj3800 .
● HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer: http://www.hp.com/support/cljcp3505 .
Table 1-1 Printer guides
Guide
Getting started guide
HP Jetdirect Embedded Print
Server Administrators Guide
Accessory and consumable installation guides
User guide
Online Help
Description
Provides step-by-step instructions for installing and setting up the printer.
Provides instructions to configure and troubleshoot the HP Jetdirect print server.
Provide step-by-step instructions for installing the accessories and supplies. These guides are supplied with the optional printer accessories and supplies.
Provides detailed information for using and troubleshooting the printer. Available on the printer CD.
Provides information about options that are available in the printer drivers. To view a
Help file, open the online Help through the printer driver.
2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printers at a glance
The HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3600, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers are available in the following configurations.
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer configurations
HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer HP Color LaserJet
3000n printer
HP Color LaserJet
3000dn printer
HP Color LaserJet
3000dtn printer
● Prints up to 30 pages per minute
(ppm) on letter-size media or
29 ppm on A4-size media in monochrome (black and white) and 15 ppm in color
● 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1) and 250-sheet input tray
(tray 2)
● Hi-Speed universal serial bus
(USB) 2.0 port and enhanced input/output (EIO) slot
● 64 MB RAM
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, plus:
● 64 MB RAM (128 total)
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100 Base-TX networks
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, plus:
● 192 MB RAM (256 total)
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100 Base-TX networks
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000 printer, plus:
● 192 MB RAM (256 total)
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100 Base-TX networks
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
● 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3)
ENWW Printers at a glance 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer
Table 1-3 HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer configurations
HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer HP Color LaserJet 3600n printer HP Color LaserJet 3600dn printer
● 17 ppm print speed
● 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1) and 250-sheet input tray
(tray 2)
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port
● 64 MB RAM
The features of the HP Color LaserJet
3600 printer, plus:
The features of the HP Color LaserJet
3600 printer, plus:
● HP Jetdirect value-featured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-T/100Base-TX networks
● 64 MB RAM (128 total)
● Automatic 2-sided (duplex) printing
● 64 MB RAM
● HP Jetdirect value-featured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-T/100Base-TX networks
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer
Table 1-4 HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer configurations
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer HP Color LaserJet
3800n printer
HP Color LaserJet
3800dn printer
HP Color LaserJet
3800dtn printer
● 22 ppm (letter-size) or 21 ppm
(A4) print speed
● 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1) and 250-sheet input tray (tray 2)
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port and EIO slot
● 96 MB RAM
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, plus:
● 64 MB RAM (160 total)
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, plus:
● 192 MB RAM (288 total)
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
The features of the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, plus:
● 192 MB RAM (288 total)
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
● 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3)
4 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer
The HP Color LaserJet CP3505 is available in the configurations described below.
Table 1-5 HP Color LaserJet CP3505 configurations
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 HP Color LaserJet
CP3505n
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505dn
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505x
● 22 ppm (letter-size) or 21 ppm
(A4) print speed
● 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1) and 250-sheet input tray (tray 2)
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port and EIO slot
● 256 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505, plus:
● 256 MB RAM
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505, plus:
● 384 MB RAM
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505, plus:
● 384 MB RAM
● Automatic 2-sided
(duplex) printing
● HP Jetdirect fullfeatured embedded print server to connect to 10Base-
T/100Base-TX networks
● 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3).
ENWW Printers at a glance 5
Features at a glance
Table 1-6 Features
Feature HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer
Performance
User interface
Printer drivers
Job storage
Fonts
Expandability
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer
● 533 MHz processor
● Graphic display
● Control-panel help
● 360 MHz processor
● Graphic display
● Control-panel help
● HP Easy Printer Care Software
(a Windows ® - or Macintoshbased status and troubleshooting tool)
● HP Easy Printer Care Software
(a Windows- or Macintoshbased status and troubleshooting tool)
● Windows and Macintosh printer drivers
● Windows and Macintosh printer drivers
● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and to order supplies (administrator tool for network-connected models only)
● Embedded Web server to configure network settings only
(administrator tool for networkconnected models only)
● HP formatter
● HP PCL 5c
● Host formatter
HP JetReady 4.2
● HP PCL 6
● PostScript ® 3 emulation
● Fonts, forms, and other macros
● Job retention
● 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript 3 emulation
● 80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution
● Optional 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3) (standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 3000dtn printer)
● Dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs)
None
None
● Optional 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3)
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer and HP Color LaserJet
CP3505 Series printer
● 533 MHz processor
● Graphic display
● Control-panel help
● HP Easy Printer Care Software
(a Windows- or Macintoshbased status and troubleshooting tool)
● Windows and Macintosh printer drivers
● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and to order supplies (administrator tool for network-connected models only)
● HP formatter
● HP PCL 5c
● HP PCL 6
● PostScript 3 emulation
● Fonts, forms, and other macros
● Job retention
● 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript 3 emulation
● 80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution
● Optional 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3) (standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn and
CP3505 printers)
● DIMMs
6 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Table 1-6 Features (continued)
Feature
Connectivity
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 cable interface
● HP Jetdirect full-featured embedded print server
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3000n, 3000dn, and
3000dtn printers)
● HP Web Jetadmin software
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3000n, 3000dn, and
3000dtn printers)
● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 cable interface
● HP Jetdirect value-featured embedded print server
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3600n and 3600dn printers)
● HP Web Jetadmin software
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3600n and 3600dn printers)
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer and HP Color LaserJet
CP3505 Series printer
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0 cable interface
● HP Jetdirect full-featured embedded print server
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3800n, 3800dn, and
3800dtn printers and the HP
Color LaserJet CP3505n,
CP3505dn, and CP3505x printers)
● HP Web Jetadmin software
(standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3800n, 3800dn, and
3800dtn printers and the HP
Color LaserJet CP3505n,
CP3505dn, and CP3505x printers)
● Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot
Environmental features
● Sleep-mode setting
● High content of recyclable components and materials
● ENERGY STAR ® qualified models; see http://www.hp.com/go/energystar
Paper handling ● Input
● Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 20 envelopes.
Supplies
Accessibility
● Tray 2: 250-sheet tray that automatically detects standard paper sizes up to legal and allows printing on custom-size paper.
● Tray 3: 500-sheet tray that automatically detect standard paper sizes up to legal and allows printing on custom-size paper.
● Output
● Face-up output bin
● Face-down output bin
● Supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining
● No-shake cartridge design
● Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation
● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities (using HP Easy Printer Care Software)
● The online user guide is compatible with text screen-readers.
● Print cartridges can be installed and removed by using one hand.
● All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.
● Media can be loaded in tray 1 by using one hand.
ENWW Features at a glance 7
Walkaround
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 1-1 Front view (shown with optional 500-sheet paper feeder)
7
8
3
4
1
2
5
6
Output bin extender
Output bin
Top cover (This part is called the upper cover in this service manual.)
Printer control panel
Front door (This part is called the front cover in this service manual.)
Tray 1 (holds 100 sheets of standard paper) (This part is called the multipurpose-tray assembly in this service manual.)
Tray 2 cassette (holds 250 sheets of standard paper)
Tray 3 cassette (optional; holds 500 sheets of standard paper)
8 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 1-2 Back and side view
1
2
3
4
5
On/off switch
Power connection
EIO slot (available on the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers)
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port
Network port (available on the HP Color LaserJet 3000n, 3000dn, 3000dtn, 3600n, 3600dn, 3800n, 3800dn, and
3800dtn, CP3505n, CP3505dn, and CP3505x printers)
Walkaround 9
Control-panel overview
The control panel provides controls for printer functions and shows messages about the printer, print jobs, and supplies status.
Figure 1-3 Control panel buttons and lights
Number
1
Button or light
Stop button
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Menu button
Ready light
Data light
Attention light
Back arrow ( ) button
Up arrow ( ) button
Select ( ) button
Down arrow ( ) button
Help ( ) button
Supplies gauge
Display
Function
Halts the current job, presents a choice to resume or cancel the current print job, clears media from the printer, and clears any continuable errors that are associated with the halted job. If the printer is not printing a job, pressing Stop pauses the printer.
Opens and closes menus.
Indicates that the printer is online or offline. See Control-panel indicator lights on page 11
.
Indicates whether or not the printer is receiving data. See
Controlpanel indicator lights on page 11
.
Indicates that a critical error has occurred. See
Control-panel indicator lights on page 11
.
Navigates backward in nested menus.
Navigates menus and text, and increases the values of numerical items in the display.
Makes selections, resumes printing after continuable errors, and overrides a non-HP print cartridge.
Navigates menus and text, and decreases the values of numerical items in the display.
Provides detailed information about printer messages or menus.
Shows the print cartridge-consumption levels. See
Display on page 11 .
Shows status information, menus, help information, and error
messages. See Display on page 11 .
The printer communicates through the display and the lights on the control panel. The display shows status information, menus, help information, and error messages. The Ready, Data, and Attention lights provide at-a-glance information about the printer state.
10 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer through the printer driver or any software program. Use the control panel to access printer features that the printer driver or software program do not support. Any changes that you make from the computer override the printer controlpanel settings. For information about using the printer driver, see
Printer software on page 13 .
Control-panel indicator lights
Indicator
Ready
(green)
Data
(green)
Attention
(amber)
On
The printer is online (can accept and process data).
Off
The printer is offline
(paused), or is turned off.
Flashing
The printer is attempting to stop printing and go offline.
This usually results from a user's request to pause the current job.
The printer is processing and receiving data.
The processed data is present in the printer, but more data is needed to complete the job, or the job is paused or waiting for errors to be cleared.
The printer is not processing or receiving data.
A critical error has occurred.
The printer requires attention.
No conditions exist that require attention.
An error has occurred. The printer requires attention.
Display
The printer display gives you complete, timely information about the printer and print jobs. Graphics illustrate levels of supplies. Menus provide access to printer functions and detailed information.
The top-level screen on the display has two areas: message/prompt and supplies gauge.
1 2
ENWW
3
Figure 1-4 Printer display
1
2
3
Message/prompt area
Supplies gauge
Print cartridge colors from left to right: black, yellow, cyan, and magenta
The message and prompt areas of the display alert you to the state of the printer and tell you how to respond.
Control-panel overview 11
The supplies gauge shows the consumption levels of print cartridges (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow). When a non-HP print cartridge is installed, a ? might appear instead of the consumption level. The supplies gauge appears whenever the printer shows the Ready state, and whenever the printer shows a warning or error message concerning a cartridge.
12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printer software
The printing-system software is included with the printer. See the getting started guide for installation instructions.
The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators, and printer drivers for access to the printer features and communication with the computer.
For a list of printer drivers and updated HP printer software, go to the following Web sites:
● HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer, go to http://www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software
● HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer, go to http://www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software
● HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer, go to http://www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software
● HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer, go to http://www.hp.com/go/cljcp3505_software
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer, HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer, and HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer drivers
The HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers use the PCL 5c, PCL 6, and
PostScript 3 emulation PDL drivers.
NOTE: For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP Color LaserJet
3000 and 3800 Series printers include a monochrome PCL 6 driver that can be installed for users who will be printing only black-and-white print jobs.
ENWW Printer software 13
Table 1-7 Available printer drivers
Operating system
1
PCL 5c
Windows 98, Windows Me (HP Color
LaserJet 3000 and 3800 only)
Windows 2000 3
PCL 6
2
PS 3 emulation
Windows XP (32-bit)
4
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (64-bit)
Windows Vista (32–bit)
Windows Vista (64–bit)
Mac OS V9.2.2 and later, and
OS X V10.2 and later (HP CLJ 3000 and 3800)
1
2
3
4
Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later (HP CLJ
CP3505)
Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems.
The HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3800 Series printers include both a monochrome and color PCL 6 driver for
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 users.
For Windows 2000 and Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), download the PCL 5 driver from http://www.hp.com/go/ clj3000_software or http://www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software .
For Windows XP (64-bit), download the PCL 6 driver from http://www.hp.com/go/clj3000_software or http://www.hp.com/go/ clj3800_software .
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer drivers
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer uses the HP JetReady 4.2 Page Description Language
(PDL), a host-based printer language. HP JetReady 4.2 uses the combined power of the computer and the printer to render the printed page in a Windows or Macintosh system environment.
HP JetReady 4.2 transfers the prerendered pages from the host computer to the printer and communicates instructions to the printer about how to convert the pages to data that can be printed.
The HP JetReady 4.2 PDL driver is available on the installation CD for the following operating systems:
● Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
● Windows 2000
● Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
● Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
● Macintosh OS X V10.2 and later
14 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
NOTE: Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems.
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation, download them from http://www.hp.com/go/clj3600_software .
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD, but are available from http://www.hp.com/go/ clj3000_software or http://www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software . These drivers are for the HP Color
LaserJet 3000 and 3800 Series printers only.
● UNIX ® model scripts
● Linux drivers
● OS/2 PS and PCL printer driver
NOTE: The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese languages.
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the HP
Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide. You can find this guide on the printer CD.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator's computer.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .
When HP Web Jetadmin is installed on a host server, any client can gain access to it by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
UNIX
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download the
HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX.
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer does not support UNIX printing.
However, if UNIX is running CUPS and has the HPLIP or HPIJS system on it, the CLJ3600 can be used to print. See http://www.linuxprinting.org
and look up the HP CLJ3600 for additional information.
Linux
For information, go to http://www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting .
ENWW Printer software 15
Utilities
The HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3600, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers are equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the printer on a network.
HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:
● Checking the printer status
● Checking the supplies status
● Setting up alerts
● Viewing printer documentation
● Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
● HP Printer Utility for Mac
You can view the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. Perform a complete software installation in order to use the HP Easy Printer Care Software.
Embedded Web server
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer embedded Web server provides network configuration and status information only.
The printers are equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about printer and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
The embedded Web server resides on the printer. It is not loaded on a network server.
See
Using the embedded Web server on page 35 for more information.
Other components and utilities
Several software programs are available for Windows and Macintosh users.
Windows
● Software installer automates the printing system installation
● Online Web registration
Macintosh OS
● PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) for use with the Apple PostScript drivers that come with the Mac OS
● Use the HP Printer Utility to change printer settings, view the current status, and receive printer event updates from a Macintosh computers. This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.2 and V10.3.
16 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
B5 (JIS)
B5 (ISO)
B6 (ISO)
16k
16k
16k
8.5 x 13
(custom)
Custom
A3
A5
A6
Legal
A4
Executive
Print-media specifications
For optimum results, HP recommends using HP media that is designed for HP Color LaserJet printers. Use media with a weight between 75 g/m 2 to 120 g/m 2 (20 to 32 lb bond). Although the printer supports media with weights between 60 g/m 2 to 220 g/m 2 (16 to 58 lb bond), using lighter or heavier media could impact the paper-jam rate and the optimal print-quality performance.
Always use the correct media-type setting in the printer driver, and configure the trays for the correct media type. HP recommends testing any paper before buying it in large quantities.
Supported paper and print media sizes
This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media.
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before printing.
Table 1-8 Supported paper and print media sizes
Size Dimensions
Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional tray 3
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 inches)
297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
125 x 176 mm (4.92 x 6.93 inches)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
184 x 260 mm (7.24 x 10.23 inches)
195 x 270 mm (7.68 x 10.63 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
(148 - 216) x (210 - 356) mm ((5.83 - 8.5) x
(8.27 - 14) inches)
ENWW Print-media specifications 17
Table 1-9 Supported envelopes and postcards
Size Dimensions
Envelope #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches)
Envelope
Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)
Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional tray 3
Media type and tray loading
Minimum media dimensions are 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches).
Maximum media dimensions are 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
Table 1-10 Tray 1 media information
Media type Media specifications Media quantity Driver settings
Paper and cardstock, standard sizes
Envelopes
Labels
Transparencies
Heavy
Glossy
Cardstock
Range:
60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 163 g/m 2 (43 lb) bond
Less than 60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/m 2
(24 lb) bond
Maximum 0.23 mm
(0.009 in.) thick
Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in.) thick
0.13 mm (0.005 in.) thick
Range:
75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond to 220 g/m 2 (48 lb) bond
Range:
163 g/m 2 (43 lb) bond to 220 g/m 2 (48 lb) cover
Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6
inch)
Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond.
Up to 10 envelopes
Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6
inch)
Labels
Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6
inch)
Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 in.)
Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 in.)
Transparencies
Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy
Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy
60 sheets
Plain or unspecified
Envelope
Cardstock
Paper orientation
N/A
Short edge leading, flap on right side facing up
Side to be printed on facing down
Side to be printed on facing down
Side to be printed on facing down
Side to be printed on facing down
Side to be printed on facing down
18 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Table 1-11 Tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4 media information
Media type Media specifications
Media quantity Driver settings
Paper and cardstock, standard sizes
Labels
Transparencies
Heavy
Glossy
Range:
60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/m 2
(32 lb) bond
Maximum 0.13
mm (0.005 in.) thick
Minimum 0.13
mm (0.005 in.) thick
0.13 mm (0.005
in.) thick
Range:
106 g/m 2 (28 lb) bond to 120 g/m 2
(32 lb) bond
Equivalent to 250 sheets (tray 2) or
500 sheets (tray
3) of 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond.
Maximum stack height: 50 sheets
(tray 2), or 100 sheets (tray 3)
Plain or unspecified
Labels
Maximum stack height: 50 sheets
(tray 2), or 100 sheets (tray 3)
Transparencies
Maximum stack height: 100 sheets (tray 2), or
200 sheets (tray 3)
Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy
Maximum stack height: 100 sheets (tray 2), or
200 sheets (tray 3)
Light glossy, glossy, or heavy glossy
Paper orientation Output
N/A
Side to be printed on facing up
Side to be printed on facing up
Side to be printed on facing up
Side to be printed on facing up
ENWW Print-media specifications 19
20 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
2 Installation and configuration
●
What is in the box
●
Site requirements
●
Connecting to a network or a computer
●
Printer memory
ENWW 21
What is in the box
The following items come in the box with the printer.
1
2
4
Stop
Menu
Ready
Data
Attention
6
5
Figure 2-1 What is in the shipping box
1.
Getting started guide
2.
Warranty booklet
3.
User guide on CD
4.
Printer
5.
Control-panel overlays (optional)
6.
Power cord
?
3
22 Chapter 2 Installation and configuration ENWW
Site requirements
Select a sturdy, well-ventilated, dust-free area that is away from direct sunlight to position the printer.
Allow enough space around the printer to open the doors and trays.
Physical specifications
Table 2-1 Physical dimensions for the HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800/CP3505 Series printers
Product Height Depth Width Weight
1
Base model 400 mm (15.7 in)
Base model plus duplexer
Base model plus optional tray 3
423 mm (16.7 in)
540 mm (21.3 in)
1
Base model plus duplexer and optional tray 3
563 mm (22.2 in)
Printer weight does not include print cartridges.
450 mm (17.7 in)
450 mm (17.7 in)
450 mm (17.7 in)
450 mm (17.7 in)
400 mm (15.7 in)
20.3 kg
(44.8 lbs)
400 mm (15.7 in)
21.5 kg
(47.4 lbs)
400 mm (15.7 in) 25.4 kg (56 lbs)
400 mm (15.7 in) 26.6 kg
(58.6 lbs)
ENWW Site requirements 23
Connecting to a network or a computer
To connect to a network
1.
Connect the network cable to the printer.
2.
Find the IP address. On the control panel, press Menu . Select INFORMATION, and then select
PRINT CONFIGURATION. The IP address is on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “TCP/IP”.
NOTE: You might need to assign an IP address depending on the type of network that is installed.
3.
Configure an IP address (if necessary). On the control panel, press Menu . Select CONFIGURE
DEVICE, select I/O, and then select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT. Select TCP/IP, select CONFIG
METHOD, select MANUAL, and then select MANUAL SETTINGS. Use the control-panel buttons to specify the IP address.
4.
Prepare for software installation. Quit all of the programs (including terminate-and-stay resident
[TSR], antivirus, and firewall programs) on the print server or on each computer that will use the printer.
5.
Install the software. Insert the CD that came with the printer, and then click Install Printer on the welcome screen. (If the welcome screen does not appear, click Start, and then click Run. Type
X:SETUP , replace X with the CD-ROM drive letter, and then click OK.)
6.
Follow the onscreen instructions. When prompted, select Wired Networking . The installer shows available printers. Select the appropriate IP address.
7.
On the Installation Type screen select Full Installation to install the most common drivers and software, select Basic Installation to install the minimum set of drivers and software
(recommended), or select Custom Installation .
NOTE: See the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide for more information. You can find this guide on the printer CD.
To use Windows with a direct connection (USB)
1.
Install the software from the CD before connecting the cable to the printer.
2.
On the welcome screen, click Install Printer. The Setup Wizard appears.
NOTE: If the welcome screen does not appear, click Start, and then click Run. Type
X:SETUP , replace X with the CD-ROM drive letter, and then click OK.
3.
Follow the onscreen instructions. When prompted, connect a USB cable between the printer and the computer.
NOTE: HP does not recommend using USB hubs. Use a USB cable that is no longer than 2 meters (6.5 feet).
4.
Click Finish. If prompted, restart the computer.
5.
Test the software installation. Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
24 Chapter 2 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
NOTE: If the installation failed, reinstall the software.
NOTE: If the New Hardware Found message appears, insert the CD, follow the onscreen instructions, and accept the default selections.
To connect to a Macintosh computer
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet CP3505 supports Macintosh OS X V10.28, V10.3, V10.4 or later. For Macintosh OS X V10.4, PPC and Intel core processor Macintosh are supported.
1.
Connect a USB cable between the printer and the computer.
NOTE: HP does not recommend using USB hubs. Use a USB cable that is no longer than 2 meters (6.5 feet).
2.
Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive. For OS V9.1 to V9.2.x, go to step 3. For OS X, go to step 7.
3.
Run the Installer and complete a custom install. Select all options, including USB Components
(Classic). When prompted, restart the computer.
4.
Run the Apple Desktop Printer Utility from HD/Applications/Utilities. Double-click HP Printer
(USB), and then click OK. Next to the USB Printer Selection, click Change.
5.
Select the printer, and then click OK. Next to Postscript Printer Description (PPD) File, click
Auto Setup, and then click Create. Save the printer setup.
6.
On the desktop, highlight the printer. Click the Printing menu, and then click Set Default
Printer. Go to step 10.
7.
Run the Installer and complete an easy install.
NOTE: If OS X and OS V9.1 (Classic) to V9.2.x (Classic) are installed on the same computer, the installer shows both the Classic and the OS X installation options.
8.
From HD/Applications/Utilities/Print Center, start the Print Center. If the printer appears in the
Printer List, delete the printer. Click Add. On the next page, click the drop-down menu, and then select USB.
9.
From the Printer Model drop-down list, select HP. Under Model Name, select the printer, and then click Add.
10.
Test the software installation. Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE: If the installation failed, reinstall the software.
Connecting to a network or a computer 25
Printer memory
NOTE: This information applies to the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers only.
The HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers have one DIMM slot.
● More printer memory DIMMs are available in 128, 256, and 512 MB increments.
● Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options are available.
NOTE: Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) that are used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with these printers.
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PostScript documents, if you use many downloaded fonts, or if a Jetdirect EIO print server will be installed for network printing capabilities. Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple collated copies at the maximum speed.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much memory is currently installed by printing a
configuration page. See Using printer information pages on page 40 .
Installing memory DIMMs
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font DIMM to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer.
To install memory DIMMs
1.
Turn the printer off, and then disconnect all power and interface cables.
26 Chapter 2 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
2.
On the right side of the printer, gently pull the black tabs together, and then pull the formatter assembly from the printer.
3.
Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
To replace a DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
4.
Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package, and then locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM.
Printer memory 27
5.
Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible.
6.
Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure that the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are using the correct DIMM type.
7.
Align the edge of the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board into the printer. Push the formatter firmly until you hear the formatter latches click into place.
NOTE: After replacing the formatter, make sure that the control panel is functioning. If the printer fans and motors are operating correctly but the control panel is not, turn the power off, and then remove the formatter and reinstall it. You might have to repeat this step several times to seat the formatter correctly.
28 Chapter 2 Installation and configuration ENWW
8.
Reconnect the power cable and USB or network cable, and then turn on the printer.
9.
After installing a memory DIMM, see Enabling memory on page 29 .
Enabling memory
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows
1.
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2.
Select this printer and select Properties.
3.
On the Configure tab, click More.
4.
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Go to
Checking DIMM installation on page 29 .
Checking DIMM installation
Check that the DIMMs are installed correctly and working.
To check DIMM installation
1.
Turn the printer on. Check that the printer is in the Ready state after it has gone through the startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly installed.
2.
Print a configuration page. See Using printer information pages on page 40 .
3.
Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare it with the configuration page that you printed before the DIMM installation.
4.
If the information on the configuration page has not changed, one of the following situations exists:
The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.
-or-
The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM.
ENWW Printer memory 29
30 Chapter 2 Installation and configuration ENWW
3 Maintenance
●
Understanding approximate supplies-replacement intervals
●
Replacing supplies
●
Managing the print cartridge
●
Cleaning the printer
●
Calibrating the printer
●
Tools for troubleshooting
ENWW 31
Understanding approximate supplies-replacement intervals
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control-panel messages that prompt you to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns can cause results to vary.
Item Printer message Page count
(HP Color LaserJet
3000)
Page count
(HP Color LaserJet
3600)
Black cartridges REPLACE BLACK
CARTRIDGE
6,500 pages
1
6,000 pages
1
1
Color cartridges REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
3,500 pages
1
4,000 pages
1
Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual colors
Page count
(HP Color LaserJet
3800 and CP3505)
6,000 pages
1
6,000 pages
1
You can use the embedded Web server to order supplies. See
Using the embedded Web server on page 41 .
32 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Replacing supplies
When you use genuine HP supplies, the printer automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need to be replaced.
Locating supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of the print cartridges.
Figure 3-1 Supply-item locations
1 Print cartridges
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the printer.
● Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the printer for removing supplies.
● Place the printer on a flat, sturdy surface.
For instructions about installing supplies, see the installation guides that came with each supply item, or see more information at http://www.hp.com/support/clj3000 , http://www.hp.com/support/clj3600 , http://www.hp.com/support/clj3800 , or http://www.hp.com/support/cljcp3505 . When you connect, select Troubleshoot a Problem.
CAUTION: Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of genuine HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP products might cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard extended warranty or service agreements.
ENWW Replacing supplies 33
Managing the print cartridge
This section provides information about HP print cartridges, including their life expectancies, how to store them, and how to identify genuine HP supplies. Information also appears about non-HP print cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine HP print cartridge, you can obtain several types of information:
● Amount of toner remaining
● Estimated number of pages remaining
● Number of pages printed
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. Service or repair that is required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be covered under the printer warranty.
When you use a non-HP print cartridge, certain features, such as remaining toner-volume data, might not be available.
Using genuine HP supplies ensures the availability of all HP printing features.
Print-cartridge authentication
A message appears on the printer control-panel display if you insert a print cartridge that is not a genuine HP print cartridge. If you believe that you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to http://www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit .
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
Always store the print cartridge in the correct environment. The storage temperature should be between -20°C and 40°C (-4°F to 104°F). The relative humidity should be between 10% and 90%.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Print-cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require and the length of life for the components inside the cartridge. The page-yield specification that HP provides is a general guideline. Actual yield can vary according to usage conditions.
At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the supply level.
34 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Checking the supply level
You can check the toner-supply level by using the control panel, the embedded Web server, or
HP Web Jetadmin.
Using the control panel
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3.
Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS.
Using the embedded Web server
1.
In your browser, type the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the printer status page.
2.
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page, which provides print-cartridge information.
Using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer. The device status page shows print-cartridge information.
Replacing print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, a message to order a replacement appears on the control-panel display. The printer can continue to print with the current print cartridge until the control-panel message instructs you to replace the cartridge.
Replace a print cartridge when a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE message appears on the printer control panel. The control-panel display indicates the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed).
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: For information about recycling used print cartridges, visit the HP LaserJet Supplies
Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle .
ENWW Managing the print cartridge 35
To replace the print cartridge
1.
Open the front cover and ETB unit.
CAUTION: Do not place any item on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is punctured, print-quality problems could result.
2.
Remove the used print cartridge from the printer.
36 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
3.
Remove the new print cartridge from the bag, and remove the tape-seal. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
4.
Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated.
ENWW
NOTE: Use the blue cartridge handles when installing the new cartridge in the printer.
Touching other areas of the print cartridge can damage the image drum and cause printquality defects.
NOTE: If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the message INCORRECT COLOR
CARTRIDGE appears on the control panel.
5.
Close the front cover and then close the top cover. After a short while, Ready appears on the control panel.
6.
Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box that the new cartridge came in.
See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
7.
If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the control panel for further instructions.
For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj3000 , http://www.hp.com/support/clj3600 , http://www.hp.com/support/clj3800 , or http://www.hp.com/support/cljcp3505 .
Managing the print cartridge 37
Cleaning the printer
Clean the outer surfaces with an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth or a water-dampened cloth.
WARNING!
Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area. It might be hot.
CAUTION: To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Component
Outer covers
Inside, general
ETB attaching roller
Paper-pickup rollers
Cleaning Method
Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth (part number 5090-3379) or a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammoniabased cleaners.
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled toner, and paper particles from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the print-cartridge cavity.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Cleaning spilled toner
Defective print cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a jam has occurred, some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner. Use a vacuum that is designed for picking up fine particles. See
Vacuum specifications on page 38 .
CAUTION: When cleaning the printer, do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers.
Vacuum specifications
Do not use a conventional vacuum to vacuum the printer or any spilled toner. The toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums.
You can use a vacuum specifically designed for cleaning if it can filter fine particles (5 microns in diameter).
38 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Calibrating the printer
Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any print-quality problems, calibrate the printer.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY, and then press .
4.
Press to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW, and then press .
ENWW Calibrating the printer 39
Tools for troubleshooting
Using printer information pages
NOTE: Printer information pages for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer are available in English only.
Page description
Menu map
Shows the control-panel menus and available settings
Configuration page
Shows printer settings and installed accessories
How to print the page
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
If PRINT MENU MAP is not highlighted, press or highlighted, and then press .
until it is
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press .
NOTE: If the printer contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard-disk accessory, an additional configuration page prints that provides information about those devices.
Supplies status page
Shows print-cartridge toner levels
Usage page
(HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only)
Shows a page count for each size of paper printed, the number of onesided (simplexed) or two-sided
(duplexed) pages, and the average percentage of coverage for each color
Demo page
Shows a color photograph that allows you to check print quality
Color usage log
Shows color-use statistics for the printer
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE, and then press .
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press
3.
Press
to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
to highlight PRINT USAGE PAGE, and then press .
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT DEMO, and then press .
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT COLOR USAGE JOB LOG, and then press .
40 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Page description
File directory
(HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only)
Shows information for all installed mass-storage devices
PCL or PS font list
(HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only)
Shows which fonts are currently installed in the printer
How to print the page
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press
3.
Press
to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY, and then press .
NOTE: This option does not appear if no mass-storage devices are installed.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT LIST, and then press .
NOTE: The font lists also show which fonts are resident on an optional hard-disk accessory or flash DIMM.
Configuring e-mail alerts
NOTE: If your host software does not support e-mail, this feature might not be available on the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer.
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server to configure the system to alert you of problems with the printer. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account(s) that you specify.
Configure the following items:
● The printer(s) that you want to monitor
● The alerts that you want to receive (for example, alerts for jams, paper out, supplies status, and cover open)
● The e-mail account(s) to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software
HP Web Jetadmin
Embedded Web server
Information location
See HP Web Jetadmin on page 15 for general information about HP Web Jetadmin.
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
See Using the embedded Web server on page 41
for general information about the embedded Web server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
Using the embedded Web server
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer embedded Web server provides network configuration and status information only.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 41
NOTE: When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software to view the printer status.
● View printer-control status information.
● Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.
● Determine the remaining life of all supplies and order new ones.
● View and change tray configurations.
● View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration.
● View and print internal pages.
● Receive notification of printer and supplies events.
● View and change network configuration.
● View support content that is specific to the current state of the printer.
● Restrict access to color printing features (HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers only).
When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
You can open the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.
Use the embedded Web server to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or
Netscape Navigator 4 and later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based or AppleTalk printer connections. You do not need Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
To open the embedded Web server by using a network connection
1.
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer in the URL field. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. See
Using printer information pages on page 40 .)
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
2.
The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer: the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Networking tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
See the following section for more information about each tab.
42 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Embedded Web server sections
Tab or section
Information tab
Provides printer, status, and configuration information
Settings tab
Provides the ability to configure the printer from your computer
Description
● Device Status: Shows the printer status and shows the life remaining of
HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media set for each tray. To change the default settings, click
Change Settings.
● Configuration Page: Shows the information that is on the printer configuration page.
● Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window.
● Event log: Shows a list of all printer events and errors.
● Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size and type.
● Diagnostics Page: Provides information about printer calibration, color density, and other parameters.
● Device Information: Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
● Control Panel: Shows messages from the printer control panel.
● Color Usage Job Log: Shows color print jobs on a job-by-job basis.
● Print: Use to send print jobs to the printer.
● Configure Device: Use to configure printer settings. This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control-panel display.
● E-mail Server: Network only. Use in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
● Alerts: Network only. Use to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies events.
● AutoSend: Use to configure the printer to send automated e-mails regarding printer configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.
● Security: Use to set a password that must be typed to gain access to the
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server.
● Edit Other Links: Use to add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.
● Device Information: Use to name the printer and assign an asset number to it.
Type the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer.
● Language: Use to specify the language in which to display the embedded Web server information.
● Date & Time: Synchronizes with a network time server.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 43
Tab or section Description
● Wake Time: Use to set or edit a wake time for the printer.
● Restrict Color: Use to set color-print-job user restrictions.
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this printer is on a network, always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab.
Networking tab
Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer, or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server.
NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected. If this printer is on a network, always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab.
Other links
Contains links that connect you to the Internet
● HP Instant Support™: Connects to the HP Web site to help you find solutions.
This service analyzes the printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your printer.
● Order Supplies: Connects to the HP Web site to order genuine HP supplies.
● Product Support: Connects to the support site for the printer for help regarding general topics.
NOTE: Internet access is necessary in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
Use the HP Easy Printer Care Software for the following tasks:
● Check the printer status.
● Check supplies status.
● Set up alerts.
● Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools.
Use the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. A complete software installation is necessary in order to use the
HP Easy Printer Care Software.
NOTE: You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software. However, if you click a Web-based link, you must have Internet access to go to the site that is associated with the link.
Supported operating systems
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is supported for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
44 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software
Use one of the following methods to open HP Easy Printer Care Software:
● On the Start menu, select Programs, select HP, and then select HP Easy Printer Care
Software.
● In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy
Printer Care Software icon.
● Double-click the desktop icon.
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections
Section Description
Overview tab ● Devices list: Shows the printers that you can select.
Contains basic status information for the printer
● Device Status section: Shows printer status information, including printer alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge; device-identification information; control-panel messages; and print-cartridge levels. After correcting a printer problem, click to update the section.
● Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridges and the status of the media that is loaded in each tray.
Support tab
Provides help information and links
● Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about printer supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.
● Provides device information, including alerts for items that need attention.
● Provides links to troubleshooting information and tools.
● Provides links to the HP Web site for registration and support, and for ordering supplies.
NOTE: Connect to the Internet to visit these Web sites.
Supplies Ordering window
Provides access to online or e-mail supplies ordering
● Ordering list: Shows the supplies that can be ordered for each printer. To order a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list.
● Shop Online for Supplies: Opens the HP supplies Web site in a new browser window.
The information about selected items can be transferred to the Web site.
● Print Shopping List: Prints the information about the selected supplies.
● Email Shopping List: Creates a text list of selected items. The list can be copied into an email message that is sent to a supplier.
NOTE: Connect to the Internet to visit these Web sites.
Alert Settings window
Use to configure the printer to automatically notify of printer issues
● Activate or deactivate the alerts feature for a certain printer.
● Set when you want alerts to appear—either when printing to that particular printer, or whenever a printer event occurs.
● Set alerts for only critical errors or for any error, including continuable errors.
● Set what type of alert should appear (pop-up message or system tray alert, and e-mail message).
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 45
Section
Device List tab
Shows information about each printer in the
Devices list
Find Other Printers window
Use to add more printers to the printer list
Description
● Printer information, including printer name, make, and model
● An icon (if the View as drop-down box is set to Tiles, which is the default setting)
● Any current alerts for the printer
If you click a printer in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care Software opens the Overview tab for that printer.
Clicking the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list opens the Find Other Printers window.
The window provides a utility that detects other network printers that can be added to the
Devices list and then monitored from a computer.
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2
1.
Open the Finder and click Applications.
2.
Click Library and click Printers.
3.
Click hp and click Utilities.
4.
Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.
5.
Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3
1.
In the Dock, click the Printer Setup Utility icon.
NOTE: If the Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.
2.
Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
HP Printer Utility features
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.
Item
Color Cleaning
Configuration Page
Supplies Status
HP Support
File Upload
Upload Fonts
Description
Prints a cleaning page.
Prints a configuration page.
Shows the printer supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.
Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information.
Transfers files from the computer to the printer.
Transfers font files from the computer to the printer.
46 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
Item
Firmware Update
Duplex Mode
Economode Toner Density
Resolution
Lock Resources
Stored Jobs
Trays Configuration
IP Settings
Additional Settings
E-mail Alerts
Description
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the printer.
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.
Locks or unlocks storage devices, such as a hard disk.
Manages print jobs that are stored on the printer hard disk.
Changes the default printer tray settings.
Changes the printer network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.
Provides access to the embedded Web server.
Configures the printer to send e-mail notices for certain events.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 47
48 Chapter 3 Maintenance ENWW
4 Theory of operation
This chapter presents an overview of the major components of the HP Color LaserJet
3000/3600/3800/CP3505 Series printers, and includes a detailed discussion of the image-formation system.
●
Engine control system
●
Laser/scanner system
●
Pickup-and-feed-system
●
Image-formation system
ENWW 49
Engine control system
The engine control system coordinates all printer functions and drives the other three systems.
The engine control system contains these components:
● DC controller
● High-voltage power-supply PCB
● Low-voltage power unit
Figure 4-1 Engine control system components
Table 4-1 Sequence of operation
Period Duration
WAIT From the time the power is turned on or the door is closed until the drum-phase adjustment is complete
STBY (Standby period)
INTR (Initial rotation)
From end of the WAIT or
LSTR period until either the print command is received from the formatter or the power is turned off
From the time the print command is received until the media is picked up
Purpose
Clears the potential from the drum surface, adjusts the drum phase, and cleans the
ETB
Maintains the printer in readiness for a print command
Remarks
Detects the toner level, cartridge presence, and environment; completes any required calibration (color registration control and image stability)
The printer enters sleep mode when the formatter sends a sleep command, and performs color registration and the image stability control when the formatter sends those commands
Prepares the photosensitive drum for printing
50 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 4-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
Period
PRINT
LSTR (Last rotation)
Duration Purpose
From the end of INTR period until the fuser paper delivery sensor detects the trailing edge of paper
From the end of the PRINT period until the delivery motor stops rotating
Forms the images on the photosensitive drum and transfers the toner image to the print media
Moves the printed sheet out of the printer
Remarks
Performs image stabilization at a specified print interval or at specified times
The printer enters the INTR period as soon as the formatter sends another print command
Power-on sequence
ENWW
Figure 4-2 Power-on sequence
Engine control system 51
Motors, fans, and solenoids
Figure 4-3 Motors, fans, and solenoids
1.
Main fan (FM1)
2.
Fuser drive motor (M1)
3.
Print-cartridge drive motors (M6, M7, M8, M9))
4.
Pickup-and-feed motor (M4)
5.
Developing separation solenoids (SL5014, SL5015)
6.
ETB drive motor (M5)
7.
Developing separation solenoid (SL5011)
8.
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5012)
52 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
9.
Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL5013)
NOTE: The following parts are included only on duplexing printer models.
10.
Duplex reverse-drive motor (M11)
11.
Duplex flapper solenoid (SL10)
12.
Duplex-feed-drive motor (M10)
13.
Door fan (duplex models only) (FM2)
ENWW Engine control system 53
Laser/scanner system
The formatter sends video signals to the DC controller, which controls the laser/scanner. When the laser/scanner system receives those signals it converts them to latent images on the photosensitive drum.
Figure 4-4 Laser/scanner system
54 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup-and-feed-system
The pickup and feed system consists of several types of feed rollers and sensors.
The DC controller drives the system by controlling the feed motor (M4), ETB motor (M5), and four drum motors (M6, M7, M8, M9) and the solenoids for the trays. In models that include an automatic duplex accessory, the duplexing feed motor (M10) and reversing motor (M11) are also part of the system.
NOTE: Tray 2 must be installed in order to print from tray 1 or tray 3.
DC controller PCA
PCA
Fuser
Fuser
Fuser
PCA
ENWW
Figure 4-5 Pickup-and-feed system
Pickup-and-feed-system 55
Sensors in the pickup-and-feed system trays (cassettes)
Paper sensors detect media in the trays. Other sensors react to the media as it moves through the paper path. If the media does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time period, the DC controller determines that a jam has occurred and alerts the formatter. In models that include an automatic duplex accessory, the paper path contains additional sensors that detect movement through the duplex path.
Figure 4-6 Pickup-and-feed system sensors
SR705
SR706
SR707
SR708
Fuser pressure-release sensor
Output-bin-full sensor
Multipurpose-tray paper sensor
Multipurpose-tray paper-position sensor (HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and CP3505 Series printers only)
56 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
SR709
SR710
SR714
SR6001
SR6005
SW2
Cassette paper-presence sensor
Top-of-page sensor
One-sided paper sensor
Paper-loop sensor
Fuser paper delivery sensor
Cassette-presence switch
Cassette pickup mechanism
When the cassette is correctly installed, SW2 detects its presence. The cassette paper sensor
(SR709) detects whether media is present in the cassette, and the cassette media sensor detects the type of media. When the cassette is correctly installed and the correct media type is present, the cassette pickup operation begins.
1.
The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter, and then begins rotating the pickup-and-feed motor (M4) at the correct speed for the media type.
2.
After the motor reaches the correct speed and the fuser is at the correct temperature, the cassette pickup solenoid (SL5012) turns on and the cassette pickup roller begins rotating.
3.
The cassette lifting plate lifts the paper stack, and the cassette pickup roller picks up one sheet of media. The separation pad prevents multi-feeds.
ENWW
Figure 4-7 Cassette pickup mechanism
Pickup-and-feed-system 57
Multipurpose-tray pickup mechanism
The cassette must be installed in order for the multipurpose (MP) tray to operate. The MP tray paper sensor (SR707) detects whether media is present in the MP tray. When the cassette is correctly installed and media is present, the MP tray pickup operation begins.
1.
The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter, and then begins rotating the pickup-and-feed motor (M4) at the correct speed for the media type.
2.
After the motor reaches the correct speed and the fuser is at the correct temperature, the MP pickup solenoid (SL5013) turns on and the MP pickup roller begins rotating.
3.
The MP pickup roller picks up one sheet of media. The separation pad prevents multi-feeds.
4.
When the media reaches SR708, motor M4 stops, the MP tray media sensor detects the media, and then motor M4 restarts and resumes feeding media into the printer.
Figure 4-8 Multipurpose-tray pickup mechanism
Feed-speed control
To optimize print quality, the pickup-and-feed motor rotates at different speeds depending on the type of media.
NOTE: In the following table, normal speed is 22 ppm for the HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505 models, and normal speed is 18 ppm for the HP CLJ 3600 models. Normal speed is 30 ppm for the HP CLJ 3000 model (black mode only).
58 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Media type
Plain
Rough
Thin
Thick
Thicker
Postcard
Thicker postcard
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Extra Heavy glossy
Envelope
Label
Gloss film
Transparency
HP CLJ 3800 and
CP3505
22 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
22 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
11 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
11 ppm
8.8 to 9 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
3.6 ppm
3.6 ppm
HP CLJ 3600
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
11 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
11 ppm
8.8 to 9 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
17.6 to 18 ppm
3.6 ppm
3.6 ppm
HP CLJ 3000 (fullcolor mode)
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
HP CLJ 3000
(monochrome mode)
30 ppm
15 ppm
30 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
15 ppm
ENWW Pickup-and-feed-system 59
Sensor jam detection
1
4
2
3
1.
Cartridge sensor assembly
2.
Paper and registration sensor covers
3.
Cassette media sensor (HP Color LaserJet 3600, 3800, CP3505 only)
4.
Temperature sensor
5.
Media-sensor assembly (500-sheet feeder)
60 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
The following jams can occur during operation:
● Pick-up delay jam. The printer makes three attempts to pick up media from a tray. When the topof-page sensor (SR710) does not detect the leading edge of a page within a specific time after the third attempt, the printing operation stops. The time varies depending on the printer model and the media source, as follows.
HP CLJ 3000: 1.3 seconds from the cassette; 2.2 seconds from the multipurpose tray (tray 1);
2.3 seconds from the paper feeder
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing, 1.0, 1.5, or 1.6 seconds; for color printing, 1.7, 2.7, or 2.9
seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: 1.3 seconds from the cassette; 2.2 seconds from the multipurpose tray (tray 1); 2.3 seconds from the paper feeder
● Pick-up stationary jam. The printing operation stops when the top-of-page sensor (SR710) does not detect the trailing edge of a page within a specific time after it has detected the leading edge.
HP CLJ 3000: approximately 3.2 seconds
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing in Normal mode, 2.3 seconds; for color printing in Normal mode,
4.6 seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: approximately 4.0 seconds
● Delivery delay jam. The printing operation stops when the fuser paper delivery sensor (SR6005) does not detect the leading edge of a page within a specific time after it has detected the leading edge.
HP CLJ 3000: approximately 3.0 seconds (in Normal print mode)
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing in Normal mode, 2.2 seconds; for color printing in Normal mode,
3.8 seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: approximately 3.8 seconds (in Normal print mode)
● Wrapping jam. The printing operation stops when the fuser paper delivery sensor (SR6005) does not detect any media within a specific time. The time varies depending on the length of the media that the top-of-page sensor (SR710) detected.
HP CLJ 3000: approximately 1.9 seconds (in Normal print mode with letter-size media)
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing in Normal mode with letter-size media, 1.3 seconds; for color printing in Normal mode with letter-size media, 2.4 seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: approximately 2.4 seconds (in Normal print mode with letter-size media)
● Delivery stationary jam. The printing operation stops when the fuser paper delivery sensor
(SR6005) continues to detect paper for a specific time after the top-of-page sensor (SR710) detected its presence.
HP CLJ 3000: approximately 3.1 seconds (in Normal print mode)
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing in Normal mode, 2.2 seconds; for color printing, 3.9 seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: approximately 3.9 seconds (in Normal print mode)
Pickup-and-feed-system 61
● Duplexing pickup delay jam (for models that include an automatic duplex accessory). The printing operation stops when the top-of-page sensor (SR710) does not detect the leading edge of the second side of the paper within a specific time after the duplexing feed motor (M10) started rotating.
HP CLJ 3000: approximately 2.0 seconds (in Normal print mode)
HP CLJ 3600: for black printing in Normal mode, 1.4 seconds; for color printing, 2.5 seconds
HP CLJ 3800 and CP3505: approximately 2.5 seconds (in Normal print mode)
● Residual-paper jam. The printing operation stops when any of the following sensors detects media during the initial sequence period:
Top-of-page sensor (SR710)
Paper-loop sensor (SR6001)
Fuser paper delivery sensor (SR6005)
Duplexing reverse sensor (SR823)
Multipurpose tray (MPT) paper-position sensor (SR708)
● Door-open jam. The printing operation stops when the DC controller detects that a printer door is open.
62 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Image-formation system
The image-formation system, which forms a toner image on media, consists of several interdependent systems:
● Electrostatic latent-image-formation
● Developing
● Transfer
● Fuser
● Drum cleaning
The printer includes four print cartridges that contain the toner used to create the image on the media. Toner is applied in the following order, using only the colors necessary for a specific image: magenta (M), cyan (C), yellow (Y), and black (Bk).
ENWW
Figure 4-9 Image formation system
Image-formation system 63
Image-formation process
Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies including electronics, optics, and electrographics to provide a printed page. Each process functions independently and must be coordinated with the other processes. Image formation consists of the following five processes:
1.
Latent-image formation
2.
Developing
3.
Image transfer
4.
Fusing
5.
Transfer-belt cleaning
These processes are divided into ten steps, which are shown in
Figure 4-10 Image-formation steps on page 65 and described in the following sections.
64 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-10 Image-formation steps
Latent-image formation stage
During the three steps that comprise this stage, a latent image is formed by applying a negative charge to the photosensitive drum. You cannot see this image on the drum.
Step 1: pre-exposure
The pre-exposure LED hits the photosensitive drum surface and eliminates any residual charge on the surface.
ENWW Image-formation system 65
Figure 4-11 Pre-exposure
Step 2: primary charging
A high-voltage dc bias is applied to the primary charging roller, which is made of conductive rubber and is in contact with the drum surface. As the roller moves across the drum, it applies the negative charge to that surface.
Step 3: laser-beam exposure
The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on portions of the drum surface. An electrostatic latent image is formed where the negative charge was neutralized.
Figure 4-12 Laser-beam exposure
Developing stage
The developing cylinder comes in contact with the photosensitive drum and deposits toner on the electrostatic latent image.
Step 4: developing
Toner acquires a negative charge as a result of the friction from the developing cylinder rotating against the developing blade. When the negatively charged toner comes in contact with the drum, it adheres to the electrostatic latent image. When the toner is on the drum the image becomes visible.
Transfer stage
66 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Step 5: media feed
The printer generates electrostatic force to pull a sheet of print media to the ETB. The sheet adheres to the belt and travels between the ETB engaged motor and the attraction roller.
The attraction roller transfer positive dc bias to the media so that the negatively charged toner can be easily transferred from the drum to the sheet.
Figure 4-13 Media feed
Step 6: image transfer
The ETB carries the positively charged media over the photosensitive drum. As it passes between the transfer roller and the drum, the transfer roller applies a positive dc bias to the belt. Negatively charged media attracts negatively charged toner from the drum surface. This process is repeated for each toner color.
Figure 4-14 Image transfer
Step 7: separation from the drum
The beam strength or stiffness of media combined with the ETB holding force causes the media to separate from the drum. The sheet remains on the ETB and continues to travel through the printer.
ENWW Image-formation system 67
Figure 4-15 Separation from the drum
Step 8: separation from the ETB
The elasticity of the print media causes it to separate from the ETB. The static-charge eliminator is not involved during this step.
Fusing stage
Until the fusing stage is complete, the image is not permanently affixed to the print media. The toner can be easily smudged until the heat and pressure of the fusing process fix the image to the sheet.
Step 9: fusing
The printer uses a ceramic heater to accomplish the color-on-demand fusing process. The heater has a low heat capacity, which results in a short warm-up period and yields energy savings.
Figure 4-16 Fusing
Cleaning stage
Not all of the toner is removed from the photosensitive drum during the transfer stage. During the cleaning stage, the residual, or waste, toner is cleared from the drum surface to prepare the surface for the next latent-image formation.
68 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Step 10: drum cleaning
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and deposits it in the waste-toner container. The drum is now clear, and is ready for the next imageformation process.
Print cartridge
This printer has four print cartridges: magenta (M), cyan (C), yellow (Y), and black (Bk). Each cartridge holds non-magnetic, single-component toner that is composed of resins in the four colors.
In addition to the toner, each cartridge contains a developing cylinder, toner-feed roller, and stirrer.
The developer motor rotates these parts so that each print cartridge can deposit toner to form a visible image on the photosensitive drum.
ENWW
Figure 4-17 Print cartridge
The cartridges in this printer include the photosensitive drum, the primary charging roller, and the developing roller. Each cartridge performs these functions:
● Memory tag control
● Cartridge presence detection
● Developer roller engagement and disengagement control
Image-formation system 69
Print-cartridge activation
A memory tag is a nonvolatile memory that is built into the print cartridge. The DC controller reads and writes data that is stored in the memory tag. The DC controller reads data at the following times:
● When the power is turned on
● When someone closes the front cover
● When it receives a command from the formatter
The DC controller writes information at the following times:
● At a specified interval during printing
● When it receives a command from the formatter
When the read/write operation fails or the wrong data is read or written, the DC controller determines that an error has occurred and notifies the formatter of a cartridge-memory abnormality. Printing then stops.
Figure 4-18 Print-cartridge activation
70 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
5 Removal and replacement
●
Removal and replacement strategy
●
External doors, covers, and panels
●
Internal assemblies
●
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs)
●
Sensors
●
500-sheet feeder
ENWW 71
Removal and replacement strategy
Introduction
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures.
HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.
WARNING!
Turn the printer off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the printer. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, as well as damage to the device. The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However, the power supply should be disconnected during parts removal.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESDprotected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation.
NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
The printer shown in this chapter is a duplex model. It has a duplex fan mounted to the front cover, a duplex-feed-drive assembly, and a duplexing-reverse-drive assembly mounted under the upper (top) cover. Simplex model printers do not have these parts.
The electrostatic transfer belt (ETB) shown in this chapter is for the duplex model printer. The
ETB for the simplex model looks different.
72 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length
● Small flatblade screwdriver
● Needle-nose pliers
● ESD mat (if one is available)
● Penlight (optional)
CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver
(callout 2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads.
CAUTION: Do not pull directly on the wires to disconnect them. Always pull on the plastic body of a connector to avoid damaging the connector wires.
Figure 5-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison
ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 73
Types of screws
Illustration Description
Screw with washer
Size
M3X8
Screw, RS
Screw, tapping, truss head
M3X6
M3X10
M4X10
Part Number
XA9–1420–000CN
XA9–1499–000CN
Use
Used to secure metal components to metal components (for example, a ground wire to the frame)
Used to secure metal to metal
XB4–7401–000CN Used to secure anything to plastic
74 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Service approach
Printer repair normally begins by using the printer internal diagnostics and the following two-step process:
1.
Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the network or server, or the printer).
2.
Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 6.
After a faulty part is located, the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field-replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard Company does not support replacement of components on the printed circuit assembles.
Before performing service
● Remove all media.
● Unplug the power cable.
● Place the product on an ESD mat (if available).
● Remove the print cartridges.
● Remove the tray 2 cassette.
After performing service
● Return all media to the trays.
● Plug in the power cable.
● Reinstall the print cartridges.
● Reinstall the tray 2 cassette.
ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 75
Print cartridges
1.
Open the front cover.
Figure 5-2 Remove the print cartridges (1 of 2)
2.
Grasp the two blue handles on the print cartridge, and pull the cartridge out of the printer.
Figure 5-3 Remove the print cartridges (2 of 2)
76 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
External doors, covers, and panels
Front cover
This part is called the front door in the user documentation and in chapter 1, “Product information.”
NOTE: The printer shown in the following procedure is a duplex model, and has a fan mounted to the front-cover assembly. Simplex model printers do not have one.
NOTE: The ETB shown in this procedure is for the duplex model printer. The ETB for the simplex model looks different.
1.
Open the front cover.
2.
Push in the two blue ETB latch buttons (callout 1) and pull the ETB out of the printer.
1
Figure 5-4 Remove the front cover (1 of 7)
ENWW External doors, covers, and panels 77
3.
Move the two ETB connectors (callout 2) to the raised position (as when the front cover is closed).
2
Figure 5-5 Remove the front cover (2 of 7)
4.
Lift the front cover slightly, and then gently pry the retainer arms off of the clips.
Figure 5-6 Remove the front cover (3 of 7)
78 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
For duplex models, use the following procedure to remove the fan. For simplex models, skip to the next step.
a.
Remove two screws (callout 3) that secure the fan to the cover and one screw that secures the wire-harness cover (callout 4).
4
3
Figure 5-7 Remove the front cover (4 of 7) b.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the wire-harness-cover locking tab (callout 5) and remove the wire-harness cover.
Remove the fan and set it next to the printer.
ENWW
Figure 5-8 Remove the front cover (5 of 7)
External doors, covers, and panels 79
6.
Support the door and remove four screws (callout 6).
6
Figure 5-9 Remove the front cover (6 of 7)
80 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7.
Pull the front cover forward to remove it.
Figure 5-10 Remove the front cover (7 of 7)
TIP: Duplex model only: When you reinstall the duplex-fan wire-harness, make sure that the wire-harness is clipped correctly to the door.
ENWW External doors, covers, and panels 81
Upper cover (fuser door)
1.
Rotate the output bin towards the front of the printer and remove it.
Figure 5-11 Remove the upper cover (1 of 5)
2.
Open the upper cover, and then squeeze the two blue fuser-locking levers to release the fuser.
Rotate the fuser up and out of the printer.
CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Wait for the fuser to cool before you remove it.
Figure 5-12 Remove the upper cover (2 of 5)
82 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Support the upper cover and remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: The screw in the recessed area (see
Figure 5-13 Remove the upper cover (3 of
5) on page 83 ) is longer than the other three mounting screws. Make sure to replace this
screw in the correct location when installing the upper cover.
1
Figure 5-13 Remove the upper cover (3 of 5)
4.
Lift up slightly on the right of the upper cover and disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2
ENWW
Figure 5-14 Remove the upper cover (4 of 5)
External doors, covers, and panels 83
5.
Lift the upper cover to remove it.
Figure 5-15 Remove the upper cover (5 of 5)
TIP: Make sure that the upper cover is seated correctly when it is reinstalled. Wireharness cables can block the cover alignment pin and become pinched or frayed when the cover is fastened to the chassis.
84 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Rear lower cover
1.
Carefully flex the hinge bracket until you can dislodge the hinge pin. Move the rear lower cover away from the bracket to remove it.
Figure 5-16 Remove the rear lower cover (1 of 2)
NOTE: Step 2 is only necessary if you are removing the rear upper cover or installing a replacement hinge bracket.
2.
Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the hinge bracket (callout 2).
ENWW
1
2
Figure 5-17 Remove the rear lower cover (2 of 2)
External doors, covers, and panels 85
Left cover
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-18 Remove the left cover (1 of 5)
3.
Open the front cover.
4.
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the three locking tabs (callout 2) at the front of the left cover.
2
Figure 5-19 Remove the left cover (2 of 5)
86 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Release the locking tab (callout 3) at the upper front of the left cover.
3
Figure 5-20 Remove the left cover (3 of 5)
6.
Release the two locking tabs at the rear of the left cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-21 Remove the left cover (4 of 5)
External doors, covers, and panels 87
7.
Rotate the back of the cover away from the printer, and then slide the cover to the rear to disengage the two front locking tabs and release the cover.
Figure 5-22 Remove the left cover (5 of 5)
NOTE: This photograph shows the two front locking tabs low on the inside of the left cover.
88 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Right cover
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
●
Formatter cage. See Formatter cage on page 94 .
2.
Remove one screw (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-23 Remove the right cover (1 of 4)
3.
Open the front cover.
ENWW External doors, covers, and panels 89
4.
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the two locking tabs (callout 2) on the front of the right cover, and the tab on the printer chassis (callout 3).
3
2
Figure 5-24 Remove the right cover (2 of 4)
NOTE: This photograph shows the front locking tabs on the inside of the right cover.
90 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Remove the power-switch arm.
Figure 5-25 Remove the right cover (3 of 4)
ENWW External doors, covers, and panels 91
6.
Remove the cover by releasing the two rear locking tabs.
Figure 5-26 Remove the right cover (4 of 4)
TIP: When installing the right cover, make sure that the metal power-switch arm is engaged with the power switch.
92 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Rear upper cover
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85
.
●
Left cover. See Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89
.
2.
Release the cover by removing 10 screws (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-27 Remove the rear upper cover
ENWW External doors, covers, and panels 93
Internal assemblies
Formatter cage
WARNING!
Do not replace the formatter and the DC controller at the same time. Install the replacement formatter and then turn the power on. After the printer initializes, turn the power off and install the replacement DC controller.
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Before you install a replacement formatter, open the service menu (see Service menu on page 228 ) and record the following values:
● Mono cycle count
● Color cycle count
● Refurbish cycle count
● Serial number
● Service ID
2.
Push in on the two black locking levers.
94 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
3.
Pull the formatter cage away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-28 Remove the formatter cage
4.
Open the service menu (see Service menu on page 228
) and transfer the values from step 1 to the replacement formatter.
5.
When you install a replacement formatter, you must calibrate the printer. See
Calibrating the printer on page 39 .
NOTE: After replacing the formatter cage, make sure that the control panel is functioning. If the printer fans and motors are operating correctly but the control panel is not, turn the power off, and then remove the formatter cage and reinstall it. You might have to repeat this step several times to seat the formatter correctly.
Internal assemblies 95
Electrostatic transfer belt (ETB)
NOTE: The ETB shown in this procedure is for the duplex model. The ETB for the simplex model looks different, but the procedure for removing it is the same as for the duplex model.
1.
Open the front cover.
2.
Push in the two blue latch buttons (callout 1) and pull the ETB out of the printer.
1
Figure 5-29 Remove the front ETB
96 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser
CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Wait for the fuser to cool before you remove it.
1.
Open the upper (top) cover (fuser door).
2.
Squeeze the two blue fuser locking levers to release the fuser.
3.
Rotate the fuser up and out of the printer.
Figure 5-30 Remove the fuser
ENWW Internal assemblies 97
Duplex fan
NOTE: The printer shown is the duplex model, and has a duplex fan mounted to the frontcover assembly. Simplex model printers do not have this part. If you are repairing a simplex model printer, ignore this procedure.
1.
Open the front cover.
2.
Remove the two screws (callout 1) that secure the fan to the front cover and one screw that secures the wire-harness cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-31 Remove the duplex fan (1 of 3)
98 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the wire-harness-cover locking tab (callout 3).
Remove the harness cover.
3
Figure 5-32 Remove the duplex fan (2 of 3)
NOTE: When you reinstall the duplex-fan wire harness, make sure that the wireharness is clipped correctly to the door.
ENWW Internal assemblies 99
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 4) and remove the fan.
4
Figure 5-33 Remove the duplex fan (3 of 3)
TIP: When you reinstall the duplex-fan wire-harness, make sure that the wire-harness is clipped correctly to the door.
100 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Print-cartridge drive motors
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet 3000 uses a different black-print-cartridge drive motor from the HP Color LaserJet 3600/3800/CP3505 printer. You must use the correct black-printcartridge drive motor for the HP Color LaserJet 3000. Make sure that you order the black-printcartridge drive motor that is appropriate for the model. (The black-print-cartridge drive motor for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 has one additional pin in the wire-harness connector.)
1.
Remove the right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
2.
To remove the motor, disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove three screws (callout 2).
Repeat this procedure for the remaining print-cartridge motors.
2
1
2
Figure 5-34 Remove the print-cartridge motor
ENWW Internal assemblies 101
Duplex-reverse-drive assembly
NOTE: The printer shown is the duplex model, and contains a duplex-reverse-drive assembly. Simplex model printers do not have this part. If you are repairing simplex model printer, ignore the following procedure.
1.
Remove the upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
2.
Turn the upper cover over and place it on a flat surface.
3.
Remove the duplex driver PCA. See Duplex-driver PCA on page 150 .
4.
Release the tab on the delivery-roller retainer, and rotate the retainer up into the unlocked position and remove it.
Figure 5-35 Remove the duplex-reverse-drive assembly (1 of 5)
102 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Slide the delivery roller and retainer out of the upper cover.
NOTE: When you reinstall the roller, make sure that the locking tabs on the right roller collar are inserted into the slots in the assembly.
ENWW
Figure 5-36 Remove the duplex-reverse-drive assembly (2 of 5)
6.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the delivery-guide assembly (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-37 Remove the duplex-reverse-drive assembly (3 of 5)
Internal assemblies 103
7.
Remove two screws (callout 3).
3
Figure 5-38 Remove the duplex-reverse-drive assembly (4 of 5)
8.
Rotate the duplex-reverse-drive assembly up and out of the upper cover.
Figure 5-39 Remove the duplex-reverse-drive assembly (5 of 5)
104 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Duplex-feed-drive assembly
NOTE: The printer shown is the duplex model, and contains a duplex-feed drive assembly.
Simplex model printers do not have this part. If you are repairing a simplex model printer, ignore the following procedure.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89
.
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove three screws (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-40 Remove the duplex-feed-drive assembly (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal assemblies 105
3.
Carefully lift and rotate the duplex-feed-drive assembly to remove it.
Figure 5-41 Remove the duplex-feed-drive assembly (2 of 2)
106 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser drive assembly
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89
.
●
Duplex-feed-drive assembly (duplex model only). See Duplex-feed-drive assembly on page 105 .
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release two cable clamps (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-42 Remove the fuser drive assembly (1 of 4)
ENWW Internal assemblies 107
3.
Remove four screws (callout 3).
3
Figure 5-43 Remove the fuser drive assembly (2 of 4)
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 4; J213) on the driver PCA assembly and remove the wireharness from the guide (callout 5).
4
Figure 5-44 Remove the fuser drive assembly (3 of 4)
TIP: You might have to use needle-nose pliers to reattach the cable straps to the two cable clamps.
108 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Lift the fuser drive assembly off of the printer chassis.
Figure 5-45 Remove the fuser drive assembly (4 of 4)
ENWW Internal assemblies 109
Developing separation-drive assembly
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
2.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the wire-guide locking tab (callout 1), and then move the guide slightly towards the front of the printer.
1
Figure 5-46 Remove the developing separation-drive assembly (1 of 4)
110 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove three screws (callout 2) and the sheet-metal plate (callout 3).
3 2
Figure 5-47 Remove the developing separation-drive assembly (2 of 4)
4.
Disconnect two connectors (callout 4; J403 and J405) on the driver PCA and remove the wireharnesses from the two retainers (callout 5).
ENWW
4
Figure 5-48 Remove the developing separation-drive assembly (3 of 4)
TIP: When you reinstall the developing separation-drive assembly, the upper solenoid wire-harness connects to J405 and the lower solenoid wire-harness connects to J403.
Internal assemblies 111
5.
Remove three screws (callout 6) to release the developing separation-drive assembly.
6
Figure 5-49 Remove the developing separation-drive assembly (4 of 4)
NOTE: The upper drive gear (callout 7) behind the developing separation-drive assembly is not captive. Be careful not to lose the gear.
7
112 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup-and-feed assembly
NOTE: After replacing the pickup-and-feed assembly you must perform a media-sensor calibration. Failure to do so can lead to print-quality issues.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Front cover. See
Front cover on page 77
.
●
Left cover. See Left cover on page 86 .
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1) on the left side of the printer.
TIP: Remove the wire-harness from the guide on the pickup-and-feed assembly to make it easier to detach the connector.
1
Figure 5-50 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (1 of 8)
ENWW Internal assemblies 113
3.
Remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the gear cover.
2
Figure 5-51 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (2 of 8)
4.
Remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the two sheet-metal covers (callout 4).
CAUTION: Do not bend the locator tabs on the covers.
3
4
Figure 5-52 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (3 of 8)
114 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Release the locking tab (callout 5) on the pickup-and-feed driver PCA cover (callout 6), and then remove the cover.
CAUTION: Do not damage or bend the print-cartridge high-voltage springs (callout 7) when you remove the cover.
TIP: It might be easier to remove the cover if you squeeze the right end of the cover, and then lift it slightly up and to the right to release it.
7
6
Figure 5-53 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (4 of 8)
6.
Disconnect five connectors (callout 8).
8
ENWW
Figure 5-54 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (5 of 8)
Internal assemblies 115
7.
Remove two screws (callout 9) from the left side of the assembly.
9
Figure 5-55 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (6 of 8)
8.
Remove two screws (callout 10) from the right side of the assembly.
TIP: When you reinstall the lower screw, you might need to rotate the cam so it does not block access to the screw-hole.
10
Figure 5-56 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (7 of 8)
116 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
9.
Lift the pickup-and-feed assembly out of the printer.
Figure 5-57 Remove the pickup-and-feed assembly (8 of 8)
TIP: Slightly flex the chassis when you reinstall the pickup-and-feed assembly. Make sure that the assembly is flush with the chassis after it is installed.
NOTE: After replacing the pickup-and-feed assembly you must perform a media-sensor calibration. Failure to do so can lead to print-quality issues.
Calibrate the media sensor
Use the SERVICE menu to calibrate the media sensor. The SERVICE menu is locked and requires a
PIN:
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printers: 11300005
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printers: 11360005
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printers: 11380005
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printers: 06350507
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight SERVICE, and then press .
3.
Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
4.
Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk. Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all eight digits are typed.
6.
Press or to select NEW TRAY 1 MEDIA SENSOR.
ENWW Internal assemblies 117
7.
Select TRAY 1.
8.
Select YES.
118 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup-drive assembly
1.
Remove the following components:
● Front cover. See
Front cover on page 77
.
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89
.
● Pickup-and-feed assembly. See
Pickup-and-feed assembly on page 113
.
ENWW Internal assemblies 119
2.
Release the locking tab (callout 1) on the cassette guide rail to the right, and slide the rail forward to remove it.
1
Figure 5-58 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (1 of 13)
NOTE: This photograph shows the locking tab and retainers on the guide rail.
120 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove one screw (callout 2) and remove the front-cover hinge (callout 3).
2
ENWW
3
Figure 5-59 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (2 of 13)
4.
Rotate the retainer arm (callout 4) up until the tab on the pivot pin (callout 5) is aligned with the slot in the retainer arm, and then slide the retainer off of the pivot pin.
4
Figure 5-60 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (3 of 13)
Internal assemblies 121
5.
Remove all of the wire-harnesses from the guide (callout 6).
6
Figure 5-61 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (4 of 13)
6.
Disconnect three connectors (callout 7).
7
Figure 5-62 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (5 of 13)
122 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7.
Remove one screw (callout 8), and then lift up on the locking tab (callout 9) to release it.
Remove the guide (callout 10).
8
10
9
Figure 5-63 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (6 of 13)
TIP: When you reinstall the guide, make sure that the rear locking tab is seated in the sheet-metal chassis.
ENWW Internal assemblies 123
8.
Release the retainer tabs on the ETB connector link arm (callout 11) and slide the link arm off of the pivot pin.
11
Figure 5-64 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (7 of 13)
9.
Rotate the link arm until the tab on the pivot pin (callout 12) is aligned with the slot in the link arm. Remove the link arm.
TIP: The link arm causes the print-cartridge-shutter doors to open when the front cover is closed. If the shutter doors are not operating correctly, make sure that the link arm is correctly installed.
12
Figure 5-65 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (8 of 13)
124 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
10.
Remove two screws (callout 13), and then remove the ETB connector bracket (callout 14).
14
13
Figure 5-66 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (9 of 13)
11.
Remove one screw (callout 15), and then remove the sheet-metal support bracket (callout 16).
16
15
Figure 5-67 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (10 of 13)
Internal assemblies 125
12.
Remove four screws (callout 17).
17
Figure 5-68 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (11 of 13)
13.
Carefully turn the printer onto its right side. Gently pry the sheet-metal bottom plate off of its locator pins (callout 18) and away from the pickup-drive assembly (callout 19).
NOTE: The plastic printer foot can be dislodged when the bottom plate is separated from the chassis. Be careful to not lose the printer foot.
18
19
Figure 5-69 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (12 of 13)
126 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
14.
Remove two screws (callout 20) to release the pickup-drive assembly.
NOTE: Figure 5-70 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (13 of 13) on page 127 shows
the pickup drive assembly from the tray 2 cassette side.
20
Figure 5-70 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (13 of 13)
CAUTION: The small gear assembly above the pickup-drive-assembly motor is not captive. Do not lose the gears when you remove the drive assembly.
Internal assemblies 127
Laser/scanner assembly
NOTE: Always perform a full calibration procedure when you replace the laser/scanner assembly.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Remove four screws (callout 1) and remove the sheet-metal shield (callout 2).
NOTE: Only three screws secure the sheet-metal shield, but removing the fourth screw is necessary for tasks later in this procedure.
2
1
Figure 5-71 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (1 of 6)
128 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Disconnect all of the wire-harness connectors and flat flexible cables (FFCs) on the DC controller PCA (eight wire-harness connectors and eight FFCs).
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
NOTE: Remove the wire-harnesses from all of the retainers near the DC controller.
Figure 5-72 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (2 of 6)
4.
Remove 10 screws (callout 3). Push up on the sheet-metal shield to release it from the printer chassis, and remove it.
3
ENWW
Figure 5-73 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (3 of 6)
Internal assemblies 129
5.
Remove the laser/scanner wire-harness from the guide (callout 4) and the retainer (callout 5).
4
Figure 5-74 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (4 of 6)
6.
Disconnect two FFCs (callout 6), and then remove five screws (callout 7). Remove the laser/ scanner.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
7
6
Figure 5-75 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (5 of 6)
TIP: When you reinstall the laser/scanner, the longest FFC connects to the bottom connector, and the short FFC connects to the top connector on the laser/scanner.
130 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7.
Disconnect two wire-harnesses (callout 8).
CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage, do not touch the laser/scanner PCAs (callout 9) or the laser/scanner lenses (callout 10).
8
10
9
Figure 5-76 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (6 of 6)
ENWW Internal assemblies 131
Main fan
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
● High-voltage power supply. See
High-voltage power supply on page 140 .
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J1008) on the DC controller.
1
Figure 5-77 Remove the main fan (1 of 2)
132 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove one screw (callout 2) to release the fan.
2
Figure 5-78 Remove the main fan (2 of 2)
ENWW Internal assemblies 133
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs)
NOTE: For information about removing the 500-sheet feeder PCA, see
500-sheet feeder driver PCA on page 166 in the 500-sheet feeder section of this chapter.
Low-voltage power-supply PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
134 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Disconnect four wire-harness (callout 1; J1004, J1005, J1002 and J1006) on the DC controller
PCA and remove the wire-harnesses from the retainer.
1
Figure 5-79 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (1 of 6)
3.
Remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the sheet-metal shield (callout 3).
NOTE: It might not appear that you need to remove the screw securing the high-voltage power supply to the chassis, but it must be removed to feed the low-voltage power supply wire-harnesses out of the printer later in this procedure.
3
ENWW
2
Figure 5-80 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (2 of 6)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 135
4.
Remove one screw (callout 4).
4
Figure 5-81 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (3 of 6)
5.
Disconnect one connector (callout 5), and remove five screws (callout 6).
NOTE: Two of the screws have washers attached to them. Make sure that these screws are reinstalled in the same place that they are removed from.
6
Figure 5-82 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (4 of 6)
136 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6.
Use needle-nose pliers to gently squeeze the retainer tabs on the PCA standoff, and carefully pull up on the PCA to release it.
Figure 5-83 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (5 of 6)
7.
Lift the low-voltage power-supply PCA off of the printer chassis.
ENWW
Figure 5-84 Remove the low-voltage power-supply PCA (6 of 6)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 137
DC controller PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Formatter cage. See
Formatter cage on page 94 .
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Disconnect all of the wire-harness connectors and FFCs on the DC controller PCA (eight wireharness connectors and eight FFCs).
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
Figure 5-85 Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 3)
138 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
3.
Release four locking tabs (callout 1), and then remove the engine-test print switch (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-86 Remove the DC controller PCA (2 of 3)
4.
Remove four screws (callout 3) to release the DC controller PCA.
3
Figure 5-87 Remove the DC controller PCA (3 of 3)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 139
High-voltage power supply
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Disconnect two FFCs (callout 1, J1009, and J1019) on the DC controller.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
1
Figure 5-88 Remove the high-voltage power supply (1 of 3)
140 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove four screws (callout 2), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 3).
2
3
Figure 5-89 Remove the high-voltage power supply (2 of 3)
4.
Release seven locking tabs (callout 4), and then remove the high-voltage power supply.
4
ENWW
Figure 5-90 Remove the high-voltage power supply (3 of 3)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 141
Memory-controller PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Remove one FFC (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2).
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
1
2
Figure 5-91 Remove the memory-controller PCA (1 of 2)
142 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Disconnect four connectors (callout 3), and then remove three screws (callout 4) to release the memory-controller PCA.
3
4
Figure 5-92 Remove the memory-controller PCA (2 of 2)
ENWW Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 143
Driver PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
2.
Disconnect all of the connectors and FFCs on the driver PCA.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
Figure 5-93 Remove the driver PCA (1 of 2)
144 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove two screws (callout 1) to release the driver PCA.
1
Figure 5-94 Remove the driver PCA (2 of 2)
ENWW Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 145
Control panel
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
2.
Release the guide locking tab (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-95 Remove the control panel (1 of 2)
146 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove two screws (callout 3) to release the control panel.
3
Figure 5-96 Remove the control panel (2 of 2)
ENWW Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 147
Pickup-and-feed driver PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Open the front cover.
2.
Release the locking tab (callout 1) on the pickup-and-feed driver PCA cover (callout 2), and then remove the cover.
CAUTION: Do not damage or bend the print-cartridge high-voltage springs (callout 3) when you remove the cover.
3
2
1
Figure 5-97 Remove the pickup-and-feed driver PCA (1 of 3)
148 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Disconnect one FFC (callout 4; J014) on the DC controller.
4
Figure 5-98 Remove the pickup-and-feed driver PCA (2 of 3)
4.
Disconnect six connectors (callout 4), and remove one screw (callout 5) to release the pickupand-feed driver PCA.
NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet 3000 will not have the two white media-sensor connectors.
4
ENWW
Figure 5-99 Remove the pickup-and-feed driver PCA (3 of 3)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 149
Duplex-driver PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Fuser. See
Fuser on page 97 .
● Remove the upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
2.
Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-100 Remove the duplex-driver PCA (1 of 3)
150 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove one screw (callout 2).
2
Figure 5-101 Remove the duplex-driver PCA (2 of 3)
4.
Lift the duplex-driver PCA out of the upper cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-102 Remove the duplex-driver PCA (3 of 3)
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) 151
Sensors
NOTE:
For information about removing the 500-sheet media sensor, see Media sensor (500sheet feeder) on page 168
in this chapter.
Cassette media sensor (HP LaserJet 3600/3800/CP3505)
NOTE: Always perform a full calibration procedure when you replace the cassette media sensor.
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Open the front cover and remove the ETB. See
Electrostatic transfer belt (ETB) on page 96 .
2.
Release the locking tab (callout 1) on the pickup-and-feed driver PCA cover (callout 2), and then remove the cover.
CAUTION: Do not damage or bend the print-cartridge high-voltage springs (callout 3) when you remove the cover.
3
2
1
Figure 5-103 Remove the cassette media sensor (1 of 2)
152 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Disconnect one connector (callout 4) and remove one screw (callout 5). Lift the cassette media sensor (callout 6) out of the printer.
4
6
Figure 5-104 Remove the cassette media sensor (2 of 2)
ENWW Sensors 153
Temperature sensor
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J1018) and release the locking tab (callout 2). Remove the temperature sensor (callout 3).
1
3
2
Figure 5-105 Remove the temperature sensor
154 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Paper and registration sensor covers
1.
Open the front cover and remove the ETB. See
Electrostatic transfer belt (ETB) on page 96 .
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1) and the paper and registration sensor covers (callout 2).
CAUTION: Do not bend the locator tabs on the covers.
1
2
Figure 5-106 Remove the paper and registration sensor covers
ENWW Sensors 155
Cartridge-sensor PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the following components:
● Upper cover. See
Upper cover (fuser door) on page 82
.
● Rear lower cover. See
Rear lower cover on page 85 .
● Left cover. See
Left cover on page 86 .
● Right cover. See
Right cover on page 89 .
●
Rear upper cover. See Rear upper cover on page 93 .
2.
Remove four screws (callout 1) and remove the sheet-metal shield (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-107 Remove the cartridge-sensor PCA (1 of 4)
156 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Disconnect all of the wire-harness connectors and flat flexible cables (FFCs) on the DC controller PCA (eight wire-harness connectors and eight FFCs).
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the FFCs during removal or installation.
NOTE: Remove the wire-harnesses from all of the retainers near the DC controller.
Figure 5-108 Remove the cartridge-sensor PCA (2 of 4)
4.
Remove 10 screws (callout 3). Push up on the sheet-metal shield to release it from the printer chassis, and remove it.
3
ENWW
Figure 5-109 Remove the cartridge-sensor PCA (3 of 4)
Sensors 157
5.
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4) and remove three screws (callout 5). Remove the cartridge-sensor PCA from the printer.
4
Figure 5-110 Remove the cartridge-sensor PCA (4 of 4)
158 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
500-sheet feeder
500-sheet feeder right cover
1.
Remove one screw (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-111 Remove the 500-sheet feeder right cover (1 of 3)
TIP: Before proceeding, look at the following figure and note the location of the locking tabs on the right cover.
ENWW 500-sheet feeder 159
2.
Carefully pry loose the two locking tabs along the top of the cover.
Figure 5-112 Remove the 500-sheet feeder right cover (2 of 3)
3.
Rotate the top of the cover away from the feeder to release three locking tabs along the bottom of the cover.
Figure 5-113 Remove the 500-sheet feeder right cover (3 of 3)
160 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
500-sheet feeder left cover
1.
Remove one screw (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-114 Remove the 500-sheet feeder left cover (1 of 5)
TIP: Before proceeding, look at the following figure and note the location of the locking tabs on the left cover.
ENWW 500-sheet feeder 161
2.
Carefully pry loose the three locking tabs along the top of the cover.
Figure 5-115 Remove the 500-sheet feeder left cover (2 of 5)
3.
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the locking tab at the front of the cover.
Figure 5-116 Remove the 500-sheet feeder left cover (3 of 5)
162 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the locking tab at the rear of the cover.
Figure 5-117 Remove the 500-sheet feeder left cover (4 of 5)
5.
Rotate the top of the cover away from the feeder to release two locking tabs along the bottom of the cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-118 Remove the 500-sheet feeder left cover (5 of 5)
500-sheet feeder 163
500-sheet feeder rear cover
1.
Remove the following components:
●
500-sheet feeder right cover. See 500-sheet feeder right cover on page 159 .
●
500-sheet feeder left cover. See 500-sheet feeder left cover on page 161
.
2.
Release the two locking tabs along the side of the cover.
Figure 5-119 Remove the 500-sheet feeder rear cover (1 of 3)
TIP: Before proceeding, look at the following figure and note the location of the locking tabs on the rear cover.
164 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Carefully pry loose the three locking tabs along the top of the cover.
Figure 5-120 Remove the 500-sheet feeder rear cover (2 of 3)
4.
Rotate the cover up and away from the feeder chassis to remove it.
ENWW
Figure 5-121 Remove the 500-sheet feeder rear cover (3 of 3)
500-sheet feeder 165
500-sheet feeder driver PCA
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the 500-sheet feeder right cover. See
500-sheet feeder right cover on page 159
.
2.
Disconnect four connectors (callout 1)
1
Figure 5-122 Remove the 500-sheet-feeder driver PCA (1 of 2)
166 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Release the 500-sheet-feeder PCA by removing two screws (callout 2).
2
Figure 5-123 Remove the 500-sheet-feeder driver PCA (2 of 2)
ENWW 500-sheet feeder 167
Media sensor (500-sheet feeder)
CAUTION: PCAs are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the
ESD reminder when removing PCAs. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1.
Remove the 500-sheet feeder right cover. See
500-sheet feeder right cover on page 159
.
2.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J4003).
1
Figure 5-124 Remove the media sensor (500-sheet feeder) (1 of 4)
168 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the top cover on the 500–sheet feeder pickup-andfeed assembly, and then remove the cover.
CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the grounding springs that are under this cover.
Figure 5-125 Remove the media sensor (500-sheet feeder) (2 of 4)
4.
Remove the media sensor torsion spring (callout 2).
2
ENWW
Figure 5-126 Remove the media sensor (500-sheet feeder) (3 of 4)
500-sheet feeder 169
5.
Raise the media sensor, and then slide it off of the hinges to remove it.
Figure 5-127 Remove the media sensor (500-sheet feeder) (4 of 4)
170 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6 Troubleshooting
To use the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the HP LaserJet printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, the printer systems, and the basic
theory of operation are contained in Theory of operation on page 49 . Do not perform any of these
troubleshooting processes unless you understand the function of each printer component.
●
Troubleshooting process
●
Control-panel messages
●
Jams
●
Image defects
●
Repetitive-defects troubleshooting
●
Interface troubleshooting
●
Service menu
●
Diagnostics menu
●
Diagnostics
●
Test pages
●
Engine resets
●
Service ID
ENWW 171
Troubleshooting process
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the situation. This chapter also contains information to help diagnose and solve problems.
● Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s).
General topic
Environment
Media
Input trays
Print cartridges
Transfer unit and fuser
Covers
Questions
● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?
● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?
● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet?
● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters that are listed in chapter 1?
● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?
● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
● Does the customer use only supported media?
● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?
● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?
● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?
● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack?
● Is the cassette installed in the printer correctly?
● Is each print cartridge installed correctly?
● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?
● Is the front cover closed?
172 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
General topic
Condensation
Miscellaneous
Questions
● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes.
● Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the print cartridge to sit at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.
● Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.
● If the hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software, contact the Customer Care Center
(see chapter 1).
● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.
● For any print-quality issues, calibrate the printer.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 173
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to isolate and solve printer hardware problems quickly.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, proceed to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 6-1 Troubleshooting flowchart
1 Is the printer on and does a readable message appear?
Power on
2
Yes
No
Does the message Ready appear on the control-panel display?
Control-panel messages
Yes
No
Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks.
After the control-panel display is functional, go to step 2.
If an error message appears, see Control-panel messages on page 176
.
After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
3
Event log
Open the DIAGNOSTICS menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this printer.
Does the event log print?
If the event log does not print, see
Control-panel messages on page 176
.
If the paper jams inside the printer, see Jams on page 200
.
4
Information pages
Yes
No
Open the INFORMATION menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all of the accessories are installed.
Are all of the accessories installed?
If error messages appear on the control-panel display when you try to print an event log, see
Control-panel messages on page 176
.
After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, go to step 4.
If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it.
After evaluating the configuration pages, go to step 5.
5
Image quality
6
Interface
Yes
No
Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements?
Yes
No
Can the customer print successfully from the host computer?
Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process.
No
Compare the images with the sample defects in the image-defect tables.
After the print quality is acceptable, go to step 6.
Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid
IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page.
When the customer can print from the host computer, the troubleshooting process ends.
174 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Power-on checks
When you turn on the printer, if it does not make any sound or if the control-panel display is blank, check the following items:
1.
Verify that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet that has the correct voltage and not plugged into a surge protector or power strip.
2.
Verify that the on/off switch is in the on position.
3.
Make sure that the fan is running, which indicates that the system is operational.
4.
Verify that the firmware DIMM and the formatter are seated and operating correctly.
5.
Remove any HP Jetdirect or other devices, then try to turn the printer on again.
6.
Make sure that the control-panel display is connected.
7.
Run an engine test page to verify that the printer is functioning. Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch on the back of the printer.
8.
Check the two fuses on the power supply.
9.
If necessary, replace the power supply.
10.
If necessary, replace the DC controller.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 175
Control-panel messages
Control-panel message
10.32.00 UNAUTHORIZED SUPPLY
Unauthorized supply in use alternates with
For help press
Description
A new, non-HP supply has been installed.
This message appears until an HP supply is installed or you press .
10.92.YY CARTRIDGES NOT ENGAGED The print cartridges are not engaged correctly.
YY Description:
00 Black
01 Cyan
02 Magenta
03 Yellow
Recommended action
If you believe that you purchased an
HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit .
Service or repairs that are required as a result of using non-HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press . The first pending print job will be cancelled.
1.
Open and then close the front door.
2.
Make sure all the print cartridges are seated correctly.
3.
Turn the printer off and then on.
4.
Inspect each cartridge lock-lever (on the right side). Open the front door and remove all cartridges and the
ETB. Then use the ETB holder on the right side to move the lock-levers up and down. Replace the cartridge lock if it is broken.
5.
Inspect the right side cam. This piece controls the movement of the cartridge engagement arm, the cartridge shutters, and the OPC drive. You can inspect this piece without taking off the covers by wiggling the white rod arm on the right side of the ETB. If it moves easily, the part is broken and should be replaced.
6.
Inspect the ribbon cables. Folded or damaged ribbon cables can cause a short that generates an error.
7.
Inspect the cartridge guide rails to see if any are damaged.
8.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
9.
Clean the contacts on the memorycontroller PCA.
10.
Verify that contact is being made with the E-label PCA on the print cartridge.
Replace the print cartridge if the Elabel PCA is missing.
11.
On the DC controller, make sure that connectors J1022 and J1023 are seated correctly. On the driver PCA, make sure that connectors J201 and
J401 are seated correctly.
12.
Check the gears on the print-cartridge drive motors. Replace defective motors.
176 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
10.94.YY REMOVE SHIPPING LOCKS
FROM ALL CARTRIDGES
10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR
For help press
11.XX INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR alternates with
To continue press
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY 1 alternates with
Clear jam then press
Description
If all the shipping locks have been removed, the problem might be with the connectors on the DC controller.
The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag, or at least one memory tag is missing.
XX Description:
00 e-label memory error
YY Description:
00 Black
01 Cyan
02 Magenta
03 Yellow
Recommended action
1.
Remove all the print cartridges and check for orange shipping locks at each end of each cartridge. Remove any that remain.
2.
Reinstall the print cartridges.
3.
On the DC controller, make sure that connector J1020 is seated correctly
4.
Replace the DC controller.
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Remove the print cartridges, and then reinstall them.
3.
Close the front door.
4.
Turn the printer off and then on.
5.
Clean the memory controller PCB contacts to the memory tag if they are dirty.
6.
Replace the memory controller PCB if necessary.
7.
Replace the DC controller PCB if necessary.
Turn the printer off and then on.
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
The printer's internal clock is not working correctly. Printing can continue, but you are prompted to set the date and time each time you turn the printer on.
XX Description:
01 Dead clock battery
02 Dead real-time clock
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.
The printer attempted to feed paper from tray 1 (MP tray), but the leading edge did not get to the top-of-page sensor in time.
1.
Verify that tray 2 is fully inserted into the engine. A portion of the tray 1 paper path dips into tray 2.
2.
For media greater than 120 g/m 2 , verify that the media-type settings in the control panel and driver are set to
Cardstock. This enables the special mode that applies additional force for feeding heavier media. This printer is not capable of handling media heavier than 176 g/m 2 .
3.
If media is not loaded in tray 1 but an error is displayed, check the MP tray paper-present sensor by pressing the sensor and releasing it. If it springs back, it is operating properly; if it does not spring back, check the spring for the sensor.
ENWW Control-panel messages 177
Control-panel message
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY 2 alternates with
Clear jam then press
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY 3 alternates with
Clear jam then press
Description
A page is jammed in tray 2. The printer attempted to feed paper from tray 2 (main cassette), but the leading edge did not get to the top-of-page sensor in time.
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray or tray 3. The printer attempted to feed paper from tray 3 (optional tray), but the leading edge did not get to the top-of-page sensor in time.
Recommended action
4.
Check the registration flap for proper orientation; it should pivot freely to allow paper to feed from tray 2 or tray
1/3.
5.
Inspect ribbing (where accessible). If it is damaged, replace it.
1.
Check the registration flap for proper orientation; it should pivot freely to allow paper to feed from tray 2 or tray
1/3.
2.
Check the T2 pick roller lock mechanism.
3.
If using OHT, Label, or 120 g/m 2 media, follow restricted loading procedures (only 50 sheets of OHT/
Label media or 100 sheets of 120 g/m 2 media may be loaded at one time).
The lift plate springs are not stiff enough to handle greater quantities.
4.
Verify that the media basis weight does not exceed 120 g/m 2 . If it does, run media from tray 1.
5.
Inspect the paper-length adjustment guide and verify that it is set correctly.
6.
Inspect the tray 2 paper-present sensor to make sure it is not stuck in the up position. Rotate the sensor upward and release; if it drops without hesitation, it is operating properly.
1.
Verify that tray 2 is fully inserted into the engine. A portion of the tray 3 paper path is in tray 2.
2.
Verify that the pick roller is installed correctly.
3.
If using OHT, Label, or 120 g/m 2 media, follow restricted loading procedures (only 100 sheets of OHT/
Label media or 200 sheets of 120 g/m 2 media may be loaded at one time).
The lift plate springs are not stiff enough to handle greater quantities.
4.
Inspect the tray 3 paper-present sensor to make sure it is not stuck in the up position. Rotate the sensor upward and release; if it drops without hesitation, it is operating properly.
178 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
13.05.00 JAM INSIDE FRONT DOOR alternates with
For help press
13.06.00 FUSER JAM INSIDE TOP COVER alternates with
For help press
Description
A jam has occurred inside the front door.
The printer fed a sheet of paper from one of the trays and the paper made it to the topof-page sensor in time. However, the paper did not subsequently reach the fuser paperdelivery sensor in time.
Recommended action
1.
Inspect the PIU for damage. This is a delay jam; although the paper stopped in the fuser, the root cause is more likely a paper feed/pickup issue.
A jam has occurred in the fuser. The printer fed a sheet of paper from one of the trays and it made it to the top-of-page sensor in time. However, the paper did not reach the fuser paper-delivery sensor in time.
2.
Inspect the fuser for pressure-roll cover damage.
1.
Look for media in the fuser.
2.
Remove curled sheets in the output bin. Curled sheets can cause jams, especially if using light media (less than 75 g/m 2 ).
3.
For duplex engines, inspect the duplex diverter for proper orientation. If the duplex diverter is stuck in the down position, inspect the torsion spring on the left side of the diverter. It the diverter is operating sluggishly, replace it.
13.10.00 JAM INSIDE TOP COVER alternates with
For help press
13.12.00 DUPLEX PATH JAM FRONT
DOOR alternates with
4.
Inspect the fuser for pressure-rollcover damage.
A page is jammed underneath the top cover. The printer fed a sheet of paper from one of the trays and the paper made it to the duplex switchback sensor in time.
However, the paper remained there too long.
Open the top cover and remove any jammed media. Inspect the duplex switchback sensor for proper operation.
Push the sensor flag and release it; it should spring back.
A jam has occurred in the duplex output area inside the front door.
Open the front door and clear the jam.
For help press
13.20.00 FUSER JAM INSIDE TOP COVER alternates with
During a checking-printer cycle, the printer detected the presence of paper at the fuser paper-delivery sensor.
For help press
13.20.00 FUSER JAM INSIDE TOP COVER alternates with
During a checking-printer cycle, the printer detected the presence of paper at the duplex switchback sensor.
For help press
13.20.00 JAM INSIDE FRONT DOOR During a checking-printer cycle, the printer detected the presence of paper at the paper-loop sensor.
1.
Remove the fuser and look for media.
2.
Inspect the fuser paper-delivery sensor for proper orientation.
1.
Open the top cover and look for the presence of media in the duplex paper path.
2.
Inspect the sensor for proper orientation.
1.
Open the front door and look for media.
2.
Inspect the paper-loop sensor for proper orientation.
3.
If no paper is present, the root cause is more likely a PIU issue. Inspect the
PIU registration shutter for proper operation.
ENWW Control-panel messages 179
Control-panel message Description Recommended action
13.20.00 PAPER PATH JAM FRONT DOOR alternates with
For help press
A page is jammed in the paper path. During a checking-printer cycle, the printer detected the presence of paper at either the top-of-page sensor or the MP-tray-mediaposition sensor.
1.
Inspect the T2 pick-roller left-cam retention claw.
2.
Inspect the TOP sensor for proper orientation.
3.
Inspect the MP-tray-media-position sensor for proper orientation (HP CLJ
3600/3800/CP3505 only).
4.
If no paper is present, the root cause is more likely a PIU issue. Inspect the
PIU registration shutter for proper operation.
1.
Press to continue printing.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY alternates with
The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in available memory.
NOTE: Data will be lost.
For help press
To continue press
2.
Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error.
3.
Adding memory to the printer might accommodate printing of more complex pages.
22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers with an EIO device only
Press to continue printing.
NOTE: Data will be lost.
To continue press The printer EIO card in slot X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
Press to continue printing.
NOTE: Data will be lost.
22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
Press to continue printing.
NOTE: Data will be lost.
The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
To continue press
22 SERIAL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers with an EIO device only
Press to continue printing.
NOTE: Data will be lost.
To continue press The printer serial buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
22 USB I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW The printer USB buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
Press to continue printing.
alternates with
NOTE: Data will be lost.
To continue press
40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION alternates with
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only.
Press to continue printing.
180 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
To continue press
40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION alternates with
To continue press
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION alternates with
To continue press
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY X alternates with
LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE>
41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X alternates with
LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE>
41.X ERROR alternates with
To continue press
49.XXXXX ERROR alternates with
To continue turn off then on
Description
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line overrun) occurred while the printer was receiving data.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers with an EIO device only
The connection with the card in the EIO slot has broken.
The connection with the HP Jetdirect embedded print server has broken.
Recommended action
NOTE:
Press to continue printing.
NOTE:
Data will be lost.
Data will be lost.
Press to continue printing.
Media is loaded that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray.
The printer senses a different media type from what is configured in the tray.
A printer error has occurred.
X Description:
2 Beam-detected misprint error
A critical firmware error has occurred.
1.
Press to print from a different tray.
2.
To print from the current tray, load the tray with the size and type indicated.
Ensure that all trays are configured correctly before printing again.
1.
Press to print from a different tray.
2.
To print from the current tray, load the tray with the size and type indicated.
3.
If the paper pickup has been replaced, perform a media-sensor calibration
(see the instructions at the end of the
Pickup-and-feed assembly on page 113
1.
section).
Ensure that all trays are configured correctly before printing again.
Press to continue or press for more information.
2.
If the message persists after exiting the help, turn the printer off and then on.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Try printing a job from a different program. If the job prints, try printing a different file from the original program.
If the message appears only with a certain program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
3.
If the message persists with different programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the printer cables that connect to the network or the computer.
4.
Turn the printer off.
ENWW Control-panel messages 181
Control-panel message
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
182 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Description Recommended action
5.
Remove all memory DIMMs or thirdparty DIMMs from the printer. (Do not remove the firmware DIMM in the lower slot J1).
6.
Remove the printer EIO card.
7.
Turn the printer on.
8.
If the error does not persist, install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time. Turn the printer off and then on again after installing each device.
9.
Replace DIMMs and EIO devices as necessary.
10.
Reconnect all of the printer cables.
11.
If the error persists, replace the firmware DIMM.
12.
Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer.
A fuser error has occurred.
X Description:
1 Low fuser temperature
WARNING!
The fuser is hot.
Turn the printer off an allow it to cool for approximately 10 minutes before removing the fuser.
2 Fuser-warmup service 50.1 Error:
3 High fuser temperature 1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
4 Faulty fuser
7 Fuser pressure release mechanism failure
2.
Check that connector J6007 on the fuser is seated correctly. Replace the connector as necessary.
8 Low fuser temperature (subthermistor)
3.
Turn off the printer.
9 High fuser temperature (subthermistor)
4.
Remove the fuser.
5.
If there is no conduction in the main thermistor, measure the resistance between fuser connectors J6007LA-1 and J6007LA-3. If the resistance is not
100 kohms to 3 Mohms, replace the fuser.
6.
If there is no conduction in the fuser heater, measure the resistance between fuser connectors
J6007LAF-1 and J6007-2. If the resistance is not 5 ohms to 1 kohms
(100 to 127 V) or 20 ohms to 1 kohms
(220 to 240 V), replace the fuser.
7.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
8.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
ENWW
Control-panel message Description
ENWW
Recommended action
50.2 Error:
1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
2.
Check that connector J6007 on the fuser is seated correctly. Replace the connector as necessary.
3.
Turn off the printer.
4.
Remove the fuser.
5.
If there is no conduction in the subthermistor, measure the resistance between fuser connectors J6007LA-2 and J6007LA-3. If the resistance is not
100 kohms to 3 Mohms, replace the fuser.
6.
If there is no conduction in the fuser heater, measure the resistance between fuser connectors
J6007LAF-1 and J6007-2. If the resistance is not 5 ohms to 1 kohms
(100 to 127 V) or 20 ohms to 1 kohms
(220 to 240 V), replace the fuser.
7.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
50.3 Error:
1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
2.
Check that connector J6007 on the fuser is seated correctly. Replace the connector as necessary.
3.
Turn off the printer.
4.
Remove the fuser.
5.
Measure the resistance between fuser connectors J6007LA-1 and
J6007LA-3. If the resistance is not 100 kohms to 3 Mohms, replace the fuser.
6.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
7.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
50.4 Error:
1.
Improve the power supply if the power supply frequency is not 40 to 70 Hz.
2.
Verify that the proper fuser mode is set (especially for envelope printing).
Control-panel messages 183
Control-panel message Description
184 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Recommended action
3.
Replace the low-voltage power-supply
PCA.
4.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
50.7 Error:
1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
2.
Check that fuser connector J705, fuser motor connector J5008, and driver PCA connector J213 are seated correctly.
3.
Replace the fuser drive assembly.
4.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
50.8 Error:
1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
2.
Check that connector J6007 on the fuser is seated correctly. Replace the connector as necessary.
3.
Turn off the printer.
4.
Remove the fuser.
5.
If there is no conduction in the subthermistor, measure the resistance between fuser connectors J6007LA-1 and J6007LA-3. If the resistance is not
100 kohms to 3 Mohms, replace the fuser.
6.
If there is no conduction in the fuser heater, measure the resistance between fuser connectors
J6007LAF-1 and J6007-2. If the resistance is not 5 ohms to 1 kohms
(100 to 127 V) or 20 ohms to 1 kohms
(220 to 240 V), replace the fuser.
7.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
8.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
50.9 Error:
1.
Verify the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
2.
Check that connector J6007 on the fuser is seated correctly. Replace the connector as necessary.
3.
Turn off the printer.
4.
Remove the fuser.
ENWW
Control-panel message
51.XY ERROR alternates with
To continue turn off then on
53.10.01 ERROR UNSUPPORTED RAM
53.XY.ZZ
alternates with
CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT
54.XX ERROR
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR alternates with
To continue turn off then on
Description
A printer error has occurred.
X Description:
2 laser
Y Description:
0 Black
1 Cyan
2 Yellow
3 Magenta
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
Recommended action
5.
Measure the resistance between fuser connectors J6007LA-2 and
J6007LA-3. If the resistance is not 100 kohms to 3 Mohms, replace the fuser.
6.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
1.
4.
5.
Press to continue.
2.
If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat DC controller connectors
J1010, J1012, and J1021.
Replace the flat cable.
Replace the DC controller PCB as necessary.
Install a supported DIMM.
The memory DIMM is not a supported
DIMM.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer only
A printer error has occurred.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
If the message persists, replace the
DIMM.
An error has occurred with one of the tonerlevel sensors.
XX Description:
15 Yellow
3.
Replace the formatter.
1.
Make sure that connector J1020 on the DC controller is seated correctly.
2.
Replace the DC controller.
16 Magenta
17 Cyan
18 Black
A communication error between the DC controller and the formatter has occurred.
1.
Turn the printer off.
2.
Reconnect the connector between the
DC controller and the formatter.
3.
Verify that the formatter is seated correctly.
4.
Replace the formatter.
ENWW Control-panel messages 185
Control-panel message
57.XX PRINTER ERROR alternates with
To continue turn off then on
59.30 ERROR
59.40 ERROR
59.50 ERROR
59.60 ERROR
59.51 ERROR
59.61 ERROR
59.52 ERROR
59.62 ERROR
Description
A printer fan error has occurred.
XX Description:
04 Main fan
06 Duplex fan
An error occurred with the fuser motor during startup or rotation.
An error occurred with the black printcartridge drive motor during startup or rotation.
An error occurred with the cyan printcartridge drive motor during startup or rotation.
An error occurred with the magenta printcartridge drive motor during startup or rotation.
Recommended action
57.04 Error:
1.
Check that connector J1008 on the
DC controller is seated correctly.
2.
Replace the fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller.
57.06 Error:
1.
Check that connectors J802, J823, and J850 on the duplex-driver PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the fan.
3.
Replace the duplex-driver PCA.
1.
Check that connectors J5008 on the fuser motor and J213 on the driver
PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the fuser.
3.
Replace the DC controller.
1.
Check that connectors J5006 on the black print-cartridge drive motor and
J208 on the driver PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the black print-cartridge drive motor.
3.
Replace the driver PCA.
1.
Check that connectors J5004 on the cyan print-cartridge drive motor and
J207 on the driver PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the cyan print-cartridge drive motor.
3.
Replace the driver PCA.
1.
Check that connectors J5003 on the magenta print-cartridge drive motor and J207 on the driver PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the magenta print-cartridge drive motor.
3.
Replace the driver PCA.
186 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
59.53 ERROR
59.63 ERROR
59.90 ERROR
59.A0 ERROR
59.C0 ERROR
59.F0 ERROR
ENWW
Description
An error occurred with the yellow printcartridge drive motor during startup or rotation.
An error occurred with the ETB motor during startup or rotation.
An error occurred with the developing separation-drive assembly.
The transfer rollers in the ETB are not engaged.
Recommended action
1.
Check that connectors J5005 on the yellow print-cartridge drive motor and
J208 on the driver PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the yellow print-cartridge drive motor.
3.
Replace the driver PCA.
1.
Check that connectors J5002 on the
ETB motor and J206 on the driver
PCA are seated correctly.
2.
Replace the ETB.
3.
Replace the driver PCA.
1.
If the main drive assembly has been removed for service repair, verify that the main drive assembly is calibrated correctly.
2.
Check that the following connectors on the driver PCA are seated correctly: J403, J405, J213.
3.
Check that connector J1020 on the
DC controller is seated correctly.
4.
Check that connector J5008 on the fuser motor is seated correctly.
5.
Replace the developing separationdrive assembly.
6.
If the developing separation drive assembly has been replaced and the error still occurs, calibrate the developing separation drive assembly.
1.
Check that the following connectors on the driver PCA are seated correctly:
J5002 on the ETB motor
J5011 on the transfer-roller separation solenoid
J206 on the driver PCA
J1019 on the DC controller
2.
Replace the ETB motor.
3.
Replace solenoid SL5011.
4.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
5.
Replace the ETB.
6.
Replace the high-voltage power supply PCA.
Control-panel messages 187
Control-panel message
62 NO SYSTEM
64 ERROR
For help press alternates with
To continue turn off then on
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL alternates with
To continue press
Description
No system was found.
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL alternates with
A nonvolatile storage device is full. Press
to clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior could result.
To continue press
68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS
CHANGED alternates with
To continue press
79.XXXX ERROR alternates with
To continue turn off then on
8X.YYYY EIO ERROR
For the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printers only
A scan buffer error has occurred.
A nonvolatile storage device is full. Press
to clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior could result.
X Description:
0 Onboard NVRAM
1 Removable disk (flash or hard)
X Description:
0 Onboard NVRAM
1 Removable disk
One or more printer settings that were saved in the nonvolatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to the factory default. Press to clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior could result.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
A critical hardware error has occurred.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The EIO accessory card has encountered a critical error.
Recommended action
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Reseat the firmware DIMM. Make sure that it is in slot 1 (the bottom slot).
3.
Download new firmware.
4.
Replace the firmware DIMM.
1.
2.
3.
Turn the printer off and then on.
Replace the firmware DIMM.
Replace the formatter PCB.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the error persists, perform an
NVRAM initialization.
4.
For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web
Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the error persists, perform an
NVRAM initialization.
4.
For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web
Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Reseat the firmware DIMM.
3.
Reseat the formatter PCB.
4.
Replace the firmware DIMM.
5.
Replace the formatter PCB.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Reseat the EIO card.
3.
Replace the EIO card.
188 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message Description
8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR The HP Jetdirect embedded print server has encountered a critical error.
<Date> <Time>
To change press
The printer has an internal clock that tracks the date and time. You are prompted to set the correct date and time the first time you turn on the printer.
To skip, press STOP
Access Denied MENUS LOCKED
ACTION NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
FOR TRAY X alternates with
Because the printer administrator has enabled the control-panel security mechanism, you cannot modify controlpanel settings. The message disappears after a few seconds, and the printer returns to READY or BUSY state.
You are trying to set duplex registration for a tray that is configured for ANY SIZE or
ANY CUSTOM. Duplex registration is not available when the tray size is set to either of these settings.
Tray size cannot be ANY SIZE/ANY
CUSTOM
BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION alternates with
The duplexer is not installed correctly.
To continue turn off then on
Calibrating...
Canceling... <JOB NAME>
Checking paper path
Checking printer
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE alternates with
Recommended action
Turn the printer off and then on.
Press to change the date and time.
Press Stop to skip this step. You can set the date and time later by using the
SYSTEM SETUP menu.
Contact the printer administrator to change settings.
Perform a cold reset to clear passwords.
Change the size setting for the tray.
1.
Check that connector J850 is seated correctly.
2.
Check that the connectors to the duplex-driver PCA are seated correctly.
3.
Replace the duplex-drive PCA.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
No action necessary.
The printer is calibrating.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printers only
The printer is in the process of canceling a job. The message appears while the job is stopped, the paper path is flushed, and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded.
The engine is turning the rollers to check for possible jams.
The engine is performing an internal test.
The printer encountered a request for a personality that did not exist in the printer.
The job is cancelled and no pages are printed.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Try a different driver.
To continue press
NOTE: For the HP Color
LaserJet 3600 Series printers, you must use HP JetReady 4.2, the driver that was specifically designed for these printers.
CLEANING DISK X% COMPLETE alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The memory disk is being cleaned. This process might take up to an hour. During this time, no jobs can be printed.
Do not turn off the printer. Wait for the process to complete.
The printer automatically restarts at the end of the cleaning process.
ENWW Control-panel messages 189
Control-panel message Description
Cleaning...
Cleaning...Do not grab paper
Clearing event log
Clearing paper path
The printer is performing a cleaning cycle.
The printer is processing a cleaning page.
This message appears while the event log is cleared. The printer then returns to the
SERVICE menu.
The printer jammed or detected misplaced media. The printer is attempting to eject these pages automatically.
CLOSE TOP COVER AND FRONT DOOR If the top cover and front door are closed, the problem might be with the connections for the door-detection switch or the front door interlock lever.
CODE CRC ERROR
COLOR RFU FAILED
Creating...CLEANING PAGE
DATA RECEIVED alternates with
Ready
Duplexing... Do not grab paper
Event Log Empty
Recommended action
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
Close the top cover and front door.
1.
Make sure the top cover and front door are closed.
2.
Verify that the interlock lever is snapped in place and is not broken or missing.
3.
Verify that the following connectors are seated correctly:
On the driver PCA: connectors J201,
J202, and J203.
On the DC controller: connectors
J1022 and J1024.
4.
Replace the DC controller.
Reinstall the firmware.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
An error has occurred during a firmware upgrade.
An error has occurred during a firmware upgrade.
The printer is generating a cleaning page.
The printer returns to the Ready state after the cleaning page is printed.
Reinstall the firmware.
The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed. When the printer receives another file, the message disappears.
The printer is paused.
During duplex printing, the paper emerges for a short time before it is pulled back into the printer.
SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the control panel, and the event log is empty.
1.
Load the cleaning page into the multipurpose tray.
2.
Press Menu .
3.
Select PRINT QUALITY, and then press .
4.
Select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE, and then press .
If the printer is waiting for a form feed, press to continue.
If the printer is paused, press Stop to continue.
Do not pick up pages until they come to rest in the output bin.
No action necessary.
190 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
Genuine HP supplies installed
GENUINE HP SUPPLIES DESIGNED FOR
<PROD> alternates with
Description
A new HP cartridge has been installed. The printer returns to the Ready state after approximately 10 seconds.
This genuine HP supply was not designed for this printer and is not supported. The printer can print with this supply, but print quality might be affected.
Ready
Incorrect
INCORRECT <COLOR> CARTRIDGE alternates with
The PIN number is incorrect.
A color cartridge is installed in an incorrect slot.
Recommended action
No action necessary.
Replace this supply with a genuine
HP supply that is designed for this printer.
Contact the network administrator.
Press for help.
See
Replacing print cartridges on page 35
for more information.
For help press
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
For status press
INFLATE FAILURE
Initializing permanent storage
Initializing...
INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY X
Two or more print cartridges are installed in the incorrect slot.
Press and then press for help.
See
Replacing supplies on page 33
for more information.
Reinstall the firmware.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
An error has occurred during a firmware upgrade.
This message appears when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized.
This message appears when the printer is turned on and begins initialization.
A tray is open and the printer is trying to print from another tray.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
Close the tray indicated so that printing can continue.
INSTALL <COLOR> CARTRIDGE alternates with
For help press
INSTALL FUSER
For help press
The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
NOTE: Tray 2 must be correctly installed in order to print from the
MP tray.
1.
Inspect each cartridge lock-lever (on the right side). Open the front door and remove all cartridges and the
ETB. Then use the ETB holder on the right side to move the lock-levers up and down.
2.
Make sure all the print cartridges are seated correctly.
3.
Upgrade the DC controller firmware.
See
Replacing print cartridges on page 35
for more information.
1.
Press for help.
2.
Make sure that the fuser is completely seated in its slot.
ENWW Control-panel messages 191
Control-panel message
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD
FONTS/DATA
LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
For help press
LOAD TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
To use another tray press
Loading program X alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
For help press
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>
Description
Two or more cartridges are missing.
Recommended action
3.
Reseat the fuser.
4.
Turn the printer off and remove the fuser. Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors
J5013LA-2 (MAINTH) and J5013LA-1
(GND). If it is not within the range of
330k to 50k ohms (at ambient temperature), replace the fuser.
5.
Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013L-2 (FSRH) and J5013L-1 (FSRN). If it is not within the range of 12 to 52 ohms (at ambient temperature), replace the fuser.
6.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Install the missing cartridges.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
This message alternates with the name of the storage device. The storage device does not have enough memory to load the fonts or other data.
Tray X is either empty or configured for a type and size other than that specified in the job. No other tray is available.
Press and then press for help.
See
Supply replacement guidelines on page 33 for more information.
Press the data.
to continue printing without using
To solve the problem, increase the amount of memory for the device. Press for more information.
Press for help.
Tray X is either empty or configured for a type and size other than that specified in the job.
Press for help, or press to print from another tray.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer file system and are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on. The X specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded.
The multipurpose tray is empty and no other tray is available.
No action necessary.
Load media into the multipurpose tray, and press to continue.
Press for help.
Media is in the multipurpose tray, but the print job requires a specific type and size that is not currently available.
Press for help.
to print from the tray, or press
192 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message alternates with
To continue press
MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
To use another tray press
MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK alternates with
Then press to print second sides
MEM TEST FAILURE REPLACE DIMM 1
Description
No media is in the multipurpose tray, and a print job requires a specific type and size that is available in another tray.
Recommended action
Press to print from another tray, or press for help.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The memory DIMM has failed.
The printer is testing a solenoid.
Install a supported memory DIMM.
No action necessary.
Moving solenoid alternates with
To exit press STOP
NON HP SUPPLY IN USE alternates with
Ready
The first side of a manual 2-sided print job has been printed and the printer is paused until the output stack is reinserted.
Take the printed stack out of the output bin and reinsert it in the multipurpose tray to print the second side of the 2-sided print job. Press to continue.
NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED alternates with
For help press
ORDER <COLOR> CARTRIDGE alternates with
Ready
ORDER SUPPLIES alternates with
Ready
The printer has detected that a non-
HP supply is currently installed but was pressed to override.
A new, non-HP supply has been installed.
This message appears until an HP supply is installed or you press .
The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. The printer is ready and will print for the estimated number of pages indicated.
If you believe you purchased an HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit .
Service or repairs that are required as a result of using non-HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty.
If you believe you purchased an HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit .
Service or repairs that are required as a result of using non-HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press .
Order the identified print cartridge. Printing will continue until REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE appears.
NOTE: Estimated pages remaining is based on historical page coverage with this supply.
NOTE: To prevent this message from appearing, in the SYSTEM
SETUP menu, set ORDER AT to
0%.
More than one supply item is low.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the supplies. Printing can continue until REPLACE SUPPLIES appears.
ENWW Control-panel messages 193
Control-panel message
PERFORMING UPGRADE <X : YYY>%
COMPLETE alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
Performing... PAPER PATH TEST
PRINTING STOPPED
To continue press
Printing... CMYK SAMPLES
Printing... COLOR USAGE LOG
Printing... CONFIGURATION
Printing... DEMO PAGE
Printing... DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
Printing... EVENT LOG
Printing... FILE DIRECTORY
Printing... FONT LIST
Printing... MENU MAP
Description
A firmware upgrade is in process.
The printer is performing a paper-path test.
This message appears when a Print/Stop test runs and the time expires.
Recommended action
Press for help.
No action necessary. Do not turn off the printer.
No action necessary.
Press to continue printing.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer is generating the CMYK samples page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer is generating the color-usage log page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is generating the configuration page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is generating the demo page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is generating the diagnostics page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer is generating the event log page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer is generating the mass-storagedirectory page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
The printer is generating either the PCL or
PS personality typeface list and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is generating the printer menu map and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
No action necessary.
194 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
Printing... PQ troubleshooting
Printing... REGISTRATION PAGE
Printing... RGB SAMPLES
Printing... SUPPLIES STATUS
Printing... USAGE PAGE
Processing...
Processing... from tray <X>
RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with
Ready
To clear press
RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with
Ready
To clear press
RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with
Ready
To clear press
RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with
Ready
To clear press
Description Recommended action
The printer is generating the print-quality troubleshooting pages and will return to the
Ready state when the pages are printed.
The printer is generating the registration page and will return to the SET
REGISTRATION menu when the page is printed.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
The printer is generating the RGB samples page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is generating the supplies status page and will return to the Ready state when the page is printed.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
The printer is generating the usage page and will return to the online Ready state when the page is printed.
The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages. When the media begins to move, this message is replaced by a message that indicates the job status.
The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The RAM disk has failed.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do
2.
not require the RAM disk.
To clear this message, press .
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a nonexistent directory).
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer received a PJL file system command to store something on the file system, but the file system is full.
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
To clear this message, press .
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
1.
Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the RAM disk memory and try again.
2.
To clear this message, press .
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The file system is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1.
To enable writing to the RAM disk memory, use HP Web Jetadmin to turn off write protection.
2.
To clear this message, press .
ENWW Control-panel messages 195
Control-panel message
RAM DISK X Initializing alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
Receiving upgrade
Description
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
Recommended action
No action necessary.
The new RAM disk installed in slot X is initializing.
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Ready.
The printer is performing a component test.
Remove all print cartridges.
After diagnostics are complete, reinstall all print cartridges.
REMOVE ALL PRINT CARTRIDGES alternates with
To exit press STOP key
REMOVE AT LEAST ONE PRINT
CARTRIDGE alternates with
To exit press STOP key
REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE (out) alternates with
For help press
The printer is performing a disable-cartridge check or component test.
Remove one print cartridge.
After the test is complete, reinstall the print cartridge.
REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
(REPLACE SUPPLIES = STOP AT LOW) alternates with
To continue press .
REPLACE SUPPLIES alternates with
For status press
REPLACE SUPPLIES alternates with
To continue press
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Override in use alternates with
Ready
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Using black only
The print cartridge has reached its end of life. Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced.
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP
AT LOW. To override, press .
At least two print cartridges are out and need to be replaced.
More than one supply item is low, and the
REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in SYSTEM
SETUP is set to STOP AT LOW.
At least one print cartridge is out, but printing is continuing. Print-quality problems might occur.
1.
Press Menu and navigate to the
SUPPLIES STATUS menu to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the supplies.
3.
Press to continue printing.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the identified supplies.
At least one color print cartridge is out.
Printing can continue, but only the black cartridge is being used.
Press for help.
Or, if the cartridge is new:
1.
Replace the memory controller PCB.
2.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
1.
Order the print cartridge.
2.
1.
Press to identify which supplies
2.
1.
Press help.
to continue, or press for should be replaced.
Press for help.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the identified supplies.
196 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message Description alternates with
Ready
Request accepted please wait
Resend upgrade
Restoring factory settings
Restoring...
The printer has accepted a request to print an internal page, but the current job must finish printing before the internal page will print.
The firmware upgrade was not successful.
The printer is restoring factory settings.
The printer is restoring settings.
RESTRICTED FROM PRINTING IN COLOR For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only alternates with
Ready
HP Color LaserJet 3000: The printer is set to print in black only, but the job is in color.
HP Color LaserJet 3800 and CP3505: The message appears when the printer is set to
COLOR IF ALLOWED and permissions do not exist to print in color.
RFU LOAD ERROR
Rotating <COLOR> motor
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
An error has occurred during a firmware upgrade.
A component test is in progress; the component selected is <color> Cartridge
motor.
alternates with
To exit press STOP key
Rotating motor alternates with
The printer is testing a motor.
To exit press STOP key
SANITIZING DISK X% COMPLETE alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
Setting saved
SIZE MISMATCH IN TRAY X alternates with
Ready
Sleep mode on
STANDARD TOP BIN FULL
Recommended action
No action necessary.
Attempt the upgrade again.
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
HP Color LaserJet 3000: Enable color printing on the SYSTEM SETUP menu. Set
RESTRICT COLOR USE to ENABLE
COLOR.
HP Color LaserJet 3800 and CP3505: Ask the network administrator to set the user or program permissions for color printing.
Reinstall the firmware.
Press
Press
Stop
Stop
to stop this test.
to stop this test.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The memory disk is being sanitized. This process might take up to an hour. During this time, no jobs can be printed.
A menu selection has been saved.
The tray is loaded with a media size that is different from the size for which the tray is configured. Printing can continue from other trays, but not from this one.
No action necessary.
1.
Make sure the media guides are adjusted correctly.
The printer is in the sleep mode. Any button press or data received clears the sleep mode.
The output bin is full. Printing cannot continue.
Do not turn off the printer. Wait for the process to complete.
The printer automatically restarts at the end of the sanitation process.
2.
On the PAPER HANDLING menu, configure the tray for the correct size.
No action necessary. The printer automatically exits sleep mode.
Empty the output bin. Printing resumes automatically. If the message persists, inspect the delivery-tray paper-full sensor.
ENWW Control-panel messages 197
Control-panel message alternates with
Remove all paper from bin
To return to Ready press the STOP key
TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
To change size or type press
TRAY X EMPTY <TYPE> <SIZE> alternates with
Ready
TRAY X OPEN
For help press alternates with
Ready
TRAY X OPEN OR EMPTY alternates with
Ready
TYPE MISMATCH IN TRAY X alternates with
Ready
Unauthorized supply in use alternates with
Ready
Description
The printer has paused.
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray X.
Tray 3 is empty, but the current print job does not require this tray.
The tray is open, but printing can continue.
trays.
NOTE: If tray 2 is open, printing
cannot continue.
The tray is open or empty, but the current print job does not require this tray.
The tray is loaded with a media type that is different from the type for which the tray is configured. Printing can continue from other
Recommended action
Press Stop to resume printing.
No action necessary.
Press
Press
to clear the message.
to change the type or size.
Fill the tray. The message indicates the type and size of media for which the tray is currently configured.
Close the tray.
Close or fill the tray.
On the PAPER HANDLING menu, configure the tray for the correct type.
USB ACCESSORY ERROR
USB Storage <X> initializing
USB STORAGE <X> NOT FUNCTIONAL
The printer has detected that a non-HP supply is currently installed and was pressed to override.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The printer has detected too much current on the USB storage accessory.
If you believe you purchased an HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit .
Service or repairs that are required as a result of using non-HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty.
1.
Turn the printer off.
2.
Remove the USB storage accessory.
3.
Replace the USB storage accessory.
4.
Turn the printer on.
No action necessary.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The USB storage device is initializing.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The USB storage device is not working.
Replace the USB storage device.
198 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel message
USB STORAGE DEVICE FAILURE alternates with
Ready
Description
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The USB storage device has failed.
Recommended action
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the storage device.
To clear press
2.
To remove this message from the display, press .
3.
If the message persists, turn the printer off, remove and re-install the storage device, and then turn the printer on.
4.
If the message persists, replace the storage device.
1.
Printing can continue.
USB STORAGE FILE OPERATION FAILED For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only alternates with
Ready
To clear press
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a nonexistent directory).
USB STORAGE FILE SYSTEM IS FULL For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only alternates with
Ready
To clear press
USB STORAGE IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The file system is protected and no new files can be written to it.
2.
2.
To remove this message from the display, press .
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist in the software program.
1.
Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the storage device, and then try again.
To clear this message, press .
1.
To enable writing to the storage device, use HP Web Jetadmin to turn off write protection.
2.
To clear this message, turn the printer off and then on.
To clear press
USB STORAGE X REMOVED
USE TRAY X <TYPE> <SIZE>
For the HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers only
The USB storage accessory was removed while the printer was turned on.
The printer is offering a selection of alternative media to use for the print job.
1.
Turn the printer off.
2.
To continue using the USB storage accessory, reinstall it.
3.
Turn the printer on.
1.
Use and to highlight a different size or type, and then press
to select the size or type.
2.
Press to return to the previous size or type.
ENWW Control-panel messages 199
Jams
Use this illustration to troubleshoot jams in the printer. For instructions to clear jams, see Clearing jams on page 202 .
Figure 6-1 Jam locations (printer shown without optional tray 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Output bin
Paper path (inside the front cover)
Multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Trays 2, 3
Duplex path (inside the upper cover and the front cover of duplex models only)
Fuser (inside the top cover)
Jam recovery
This printer automatically provides jam recovery, a feature that specifies whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages.
● AUTO instructs the printer to attempt to reprint jammed pages.
● OFF instructs the printer not to attempt to reprint jammed pages.
NOTE: During the recovery process, the printer might reprint pages that were printed before the jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, disable the jam recovery.
To turn off jam recovery
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP, and then press .
4.
Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY, and then press .
200 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
5.
Press to highlight OFF, and then press .
6.
Press Menu to return to the Ready state.
Avoiding jams
The table below lists common causes of jams and suggests solutions for resolving jams.
Table 6-2 Common causes of jams
Cause Solution
The media does not meet HPrecommended specifications.
A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams.
You are reloading media that has already passed through a printer or copier.
A tray is loaded incorrectly.
The media is skewed.
The media is binding or sticking together.
Use only media that meets HP specifications.
Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit, and the fuser are correctly installed.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied.
Remove any excess media from the input tray. Be sure that the stack does not exceed the maximum stack height mark in the input tray.
The tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust the guides so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.
Remove the stack and flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the stack into the tray.
NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can create static electricity which can cause paper to stick together.
The media is removed before it settles into the output bin.
When duplexing, the paper is removed before the second side of the document is printed.
Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
Reset the printer and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
The media is in poor condition.
The internal rollers do not pick up media from tray 2 or tray 3.
Replace the media.
Remove the top sheet of media. If it is heavier than
163 g/m 2 (43 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.
Replace the media.
The media has rough or jagged edges.
The media is perforated or embossed.
The supplies have reached the end of their useful life.
This type of media does not separate easily. You might need to feed single sheets from the multipurpose tray.
Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies.
The media was not stored correctly. Replace the media. Media should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment.
ENWW Jams 201
Clearing jams
Procedures in the following sections correspond with a jam message that might appear on the control panel.
Jam in the multipurpose tray (tray 1)
1.
Remove the media from the tray.
2.
Grasp the jammed sheet by both corners and pull.
3.
Place the media stack in the tray.
202 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
4.
Confirm that the media guides are against the stack without bending it and that the stack does not extend above the fill tabs.
5.
Press to resume printing.
Jam in tray 2 or tray 3
1.
If the optional tray 3 is installed, pull it out and place it on a flat surface. If the jammed sheet is visible, remove it.
2.
If the sheet is not visible, check inside the printer at the top of the tray opening. Remove any jammed media.
3.
Pull out tray 2 and place it on a flat surface.
ENWW Jams 203
4.
If the jammed sheet is visible, remove it.
5.
If the sheet is not visible, check inside the printer at the top of the tray opening. Remove any jammed media.
6.
Replace tray 2 and optional tray 3.
NOTE: Use the multipurpose tray when printing on heavier paper.
7.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE: When printing from tray 2, printing resumes automatically.
204 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Jam inside the fuser area (upper cover)
1.
Open the upper cover.
2.
If the jammed sheet is visible, remove it and then close the upper cover.
3.
If the sheet is not visible, turn off the printer.
ENWW
WARNING!
The fuser will be hot. Wait 10 minutes before proceeding.
Jams 205
4.
Place your thumbs on the fuser latches, squeeze the latches, and pull up on the fuser to remove it.
5.
On the fuser, lift the shutter door.
CAUTION: Do not open the shutter door while the fuser is in the printer.
6.
Remove any jammed sheets.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before you resume printing.
206 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
7.
Hold the fuser with your thumbs on the latches, and then push both sides of the fuser into the printer. Press the fuser down until it clicks into place.
8.
Close the upper cover and then turn on the printer.
ENWW Jams 207
Jam inside the front cover
NOTE: This part is called the front door in the user documentation and in chapter 1, “Product information”.
1.
Open the front cover.
CAUTION: Do not place anything on the transfer unit. Do not touch the top of the transfer unit or the contacts on the left side of it.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before resuming printing.
2.
Remove any visible media.
208 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
3.
Locate the green registration-plate tabs that are below the bottom print cartridge.
4.
Press the tabs, and then lift the registration plate. Remove any jammed media, and then return the registration plate to its closed position.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before resuming printing.
5.
Close the front cover.
Jams 209
Jam in the duplex path
NOTE: This issue occurs only in duplex models.
1.
Turn off the printer, and open the upper cover.
If any media is visible, remove it.
2.
Open the front cover.
210 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
3.
Rotate the transfer unit up and away from the front cover.
4.
Remove any jammed sheets from under the transfer unit.
5.
Locate the green registration-plate tabs that are below the bottom print cartridge.
Jams 211
6.
Press the tabs, and then lift the registration plate. Remove any jammed media, and then return the registration plate to its closed position.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before resuming printing.
7.
Close the front cover and then turn on the printer.
Image-formation troubleshooting
This section identifies issues that can affect print quality. For additional information, see the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Print-quality problems associated with media
Some print-quality problems arise from use of inappropriate print media.
● Use media that meets HP paper specifications.
● The gloss and transparency films are very smooth. Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.
● The driver setting is incorrect. To change the paper-type setting, see Type and Size.
● The media you are using is too heavy for the paper-type setting you selected, and the toner is not fusing to the paper.
212 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
● The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source, from an unopened ream of paper, or dry out the paper (100˚C [212˚F] for 24 hours).
● Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper.
● The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this solves your problem, consult with the supplier of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer.
● The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.
● Avoid media containing metallic laminates or conductive surfaces.
Defects on overhead transparencies
Overhead transparencies can show the image-quality problems as any other type of media, as well as defects that are specific to printing on transparencies. Because transparencies are pliable while in the print path, the paper-handling components can also mark them.
NOTE: Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them.
● Change the pre-rotation setting in CONFIGURE DEVICE/PRINT QUALITY/OPTIMIZE/PRE-
ROTATION=ON. This enhances transparency print quality by raising the fuser pressure roller temperature to more closely match the sleeve temperature.
● Change the transparency mode in CONFIGURE DEVICE/PRINT QUALITY/PRINT MODES/
TRANSPARENCY to B TRNSPRNCY (Best Transparency) mode. This optimizes transparency print quality and minimizes transparency curl.
NOTE: If the printer media sensor rejects a supported color laserjet transparency, make sure that the transparency is not from an old box. Try a new box.
● In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the paper type. Also, make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
● Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer. For more information about media specifications and for ordering information, consult the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Specification Guide.
● If print-quality defects occur, then make sure that the transparencies are designed for correct toner adhesion. Use only transparencies that are designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
● Handle transparencies by the edges. Oil from fingers can cause spots and smudges on the transparencies.
● Small, random, dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
● If the selected colors are not what you want when printed, then select different colors in the program or printer driver.
● If you are using a reflective overhead projector, then use a standard overhead projector instead.
ENWW Jams 213
Print-quality problems that are related to the environment
If the printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is within specifications. See the getting started guide for this printer for information about operatingenvironment specifications.
Print-quality problems that are related to jams
Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path.
● If the printer recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the printer.
● If the media does not pass through the fuser, image defects appear on subsequent documents.
Print two to three pages to clean the printer.
Print-quality problems from toner buildup
Over time, toner and other particles can build up inside the printer. This buildup can cause the following print-quality problems:
● Marks at even intervals on the printed side of the page
● Toner that smears easily
● Toner specks on the page
● Vertical streaks or bands on the page
To correct these types of problems, clean the printer. See Cleaning the printer on page 38
.
Print-quality troubleshooting pages
Use the built-in print-quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING, and then press to print the pages.
214 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Image defects
If specific defects occur repeatedly, print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page and follow the instructions on the first page. If you cannot resolve the problem, use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem.
Image defects fall into the following categories. Links to possible causes and recommended solutions are included. In general, the items are listed in order, from minor repairs to major repairs. Check each item in the order in which it appears.
NOTE: Verify that all firmware has been upgraded to the latest version.
Table 6-3 Image defects
Image defect
Light image
Light color
Dark image
Dark color
Completely blank
All black/solid color
Dots in vertical lines
Dirt on back of paper
Dirt on front of paper
Vertical lines
White vertical lines
Horizontal lines
White horizontal lines
Missing color
Description More information
Image light in all colors
Image light in a particular color
Image dark in all colors
Image dark in a particular color
No image prints
See Table 6-4 Causes for light images on page 216 .
See Table 6-5 Causes for one color printing light on page 217
.
See Table 6-6 Causes for dark images on page 217 .
See Table 6-7 Causes for one color printing darker than others on page 218 .
See Table 6-8 Causes for a completely blank image on page 218 .
Image is all black or solid color
White dots appear in image
Dirt on the back of the page
Dirt on the front of the page
Vertical line appears in image
White vertical line appears in image
See Table 6-9 Causes for an all black or solid colored image that extends to the edge of the page on page 218 .
See Table 6-10 Causes for vertical lines of white dots on page 218
.
See Table 6-11 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper on page 219 .
See Table 6-12 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper on page 219 .
See Table 6-13 Causes for vertical lines on page 220 .
See Table 6-14 Causes for white vertical lines on page 220 .
Horizontal line appears in image
White horizontal line appears in image
Image in a particular color does not come out in color
See Table 6-15 Causes for horizontal line on page 220
.
See Table 6-16 Causes for white horizontal lines on page 221
.
See Table 6-17 Causes for a missing color on page 221
.
ENWW Image defects 215
Table 6-3 Image defects (continued)
Image defect
Blank spots
Poor fusing
Distorted Image
Color misregistration
Smearing
Misplaced image
Reversed color
Snail tracks
Description
Blank spots appear in image
Toner image is not fully fixed on the media
Image is distorted
Some color is misregistered
Image smeared in whole or in part
Whole image is incorrectly placed
White in image is output in color, and color is output in white
Streaks on the page (that look like snail tracks); the media might wrinkle
More information
See Table 6-18 Causes for blank spots on page 222 .
See Table 6-19 Causes for poor fusing on page 222 .
See Table 6-19 Causes for poor fusing on page 222 .
See Table 6-21 Causes for color misregistration on page 223 .
See Table 6-22 Causes for smearing on page 223 .
See Table 6-23 Causes for a misplaced image on page 224 .
See Table 6-24 Causes for reversed color on page 224
.
See Table 6-25 Causes for snail tracks on page 224 .
Light image
Table 6-4 Causes for light images
Cause
The image density is not adjusted correctly
The transfer unit has deteriorated
Poor secondary-transfer-bias contacts exist
Solution
Calibrate the printer.
If the transfer unit is at the end of its life or its surface has deteriorated, replace the transfer unit.
NOTE: A large white streak appearing slightly off-center of the transfer unit is not a defect. The transfer unit does not need to be replaced in this case.
On the secondary transfer roller, check the bias contacts to the high-voltage PCB. Clean them, if necessary.
Replace defective parts and deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the secondary transfer charging roller.
The secondary transfer charging roller is deformed or has deteriorated
The high-voltage PCB is defective
The DC controller PCB is defective
Contamination buildup on the scanner mirror or lenses
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Replace the scanner assembly.
Light color
Use an external device to print a solid-filled image as an example of the problem. As the sample prints, turn the printer off and remove the cartridge. Open the cartridge shutter. If the toner image on
216 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
the drum before transfer is light for more than one color, go to step A. If the toner image on the photosensitive drum is not fully transferring to the transfer unit, go to step B in the following table.
Table 6-5 Causes for one color printing light
Cause Solution
Step A Poor developing-bias contacts Check the developing-bias contacts to the high-voltage
PCB. Clean the contacts as necessary. Replace any deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the scanner assembly.
Step B
Contamination buildup on the scanner mirror or lenses
Deteriorated cartridge (photosensitive drum)
Defective high-voltage PCB
Defective DC controller PCB
Poor primary-transfer-bias contacts
Replace the cartridge that produces the light color.
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
On the transfer unit, check the primary transfer-bias-contacts to the high-voltage PCB. Clean the contacts as necessary. Replace any deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the transfer unit.
Deformed or deteriorated primary-transfer charging roller
Defective high-voltage PCB
Defective laser/scanner unit
Defective DC controller PCB
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the laser/scanner unit.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Dark image
Table 6-6 Causes for dark images
Cause
Image density is not adjusted correctly
Color misregistration sensor lens is dirty
Color misregistration sensor is defective
Environmental sensor is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Calibrate the printer.
Clean the color misregistration sensor lens.
Replace the color misregistration sensor.
Replace the environmental sensor.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
ENWW Image defects 217
Dark color
Table 6-7 Causes for one color printing darker than others
Cause Solution
Poor contacts with the primary-charging bias, developing bias, or drum grounding
High-voltage PCB is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
On the cartridge that is producing the darker color, check the primary-charging bias and developing-bias contacts to the high-voltage PCB, or the drum-grounding contacts. Clean the contacts as necessary. Replace any deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Completely blank image
Table 6-8 Causes for a completely blank image
Cause
High-voltage PCB is defective (no developing-bias output)
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
All black or solid color
Table 6-9 Causes for an all black or solid colored image that extends to the edge of the page
Cause Solution
The formatter is not fully seated, or it is defective.
Poor contacts with the primary-charging bias, developing bias, or drum grounding
Cartridge (primary-charging roller) is defective
High-voltage PCB is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Print an engine test page to make sure that the printer is functioning. If the defect does not appear on the engine test page, replace the formatter.
On the cartridge that is producing the solid color, check the primary-charging bias and developing-bias contacts to the high-voltage PCB, or the drum-grounding contacts. Clean the contacts as necessary. Replace any deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the cartridge that is producing the solid color.
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
Dots in vertical lines
Table 6-10 Causes for vertical lines of white dots
Cause
Transfer unit or primary-transfer charging roller is deformed or deteriorated
Solution
Replace the transfer unit.
218 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 6-10 Causes for vertical lines of white dots (continued)
Cause Solution
Replace the secondary-transfer charging roller.
Secondary-transfer charging roller is deformed or deteriorated
High-voltage PCB is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
Dirt on back of paper
If the defect is repetitive dirt, go to step A; if not, go to step B.
Table 6-11 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper
Cause Solution
A Repetitive debris (debris on the registration roller, pressure roller, feed roller, fuser delivery roller, or face-down delivery sub-roller)
B Dirty cassette pickup roller, feed guide, fuser inlet guide, or fuser delivery guide
See
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to identify the roller with which the problem is associated.
Clean the dirty roller. Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off.
Clean any dirt from the rollers. Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off.
Dirt on front of paper
If the defect appears in a particular color, go to step A. If it does not appear in a particular color and it is repetitive, go to step B. If it is not repetitive, go to step C.
Table 6-12 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper
Cause Solution
A Defective cartridge (deteriorated toner or scratches on the developing cylinder, photosensitive drum, or primary charging roller)
B Repetitive dirt (dirty registration sub-roller, fuser sleeve, feed sub-roller, or face-down delivery roller)
C Dirty multipurpose tray pickup roller
Defective transfer unit
Defective transfer-unit cleaning blade
Replace the cartridge of the color that matches the defect.
See Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to identify the roller with which the problem is associated.
Clean the dirty roller. Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off.
Clean dirt from the roller. Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off.
Check the transfer-unit surface. If it is scratched or dented, replace it.
Replace the transfer unit.
ENWW Image defects 219
Vertical lines
Table 6-13 Causes for vertical lines
Cause
Photosensitive drum has grooves on the circumference
Fuser sleeve has grooves on the circumference
Solution
Replace the cartridge that produces the vertical lines.
For both the OPC and the fuser, these “grooves” might just be dark lines going around the roller. The OPC and fuser can be cleaned in some instances. Use a fine lintfree cloth or coffee filter to gently rub the dark line off the
OPC or fuser roller.
Replace the fuser.
White vertical lines
If the lines appear in a particular color, go to step A. If they appear in a full-color print, go to step B.
Table 6-14 Causes for white vertical lines
Cause Solution
Replace the print cartridge.
A Scratches on the circumference of the developing cylinder (print cartridge)
Scratches on the circumference of the photosensitive drum
B Vertical scratches on the transfer unit
Vertical scratches on the fuser sleeve
Replace the print cartridge.
Replace the transfer unit.
Replace the fuser.
Horizontal line
If the line appears in a particular color, go to step A. If it appears in the full-color print, go to step B.
Table 6-15 Causes for horizontal line
Cause Solution
A The developing cylinder is deformed by remaining engaged with the photosensitive drum for too long.
Horizontal scratches on the photosensitive drum
(cartridge)
See Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether a developing cylinder is involved. If so, print about 20 pages to solve the problem. If the problem is not resolved, replace the cartridge.
Additionally, waiting overnight might help. Print several pages and then let the printer sit overnight. This allows the roller to reform, which can solve the issue.
See Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether a photosensitive drum is involved.
If so, replace the cartridge.
220 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 6-15 Causes for horizontal line (continued)
Cause
The print-cartridge cleaning blade leaves a line of toner on the drum (C-blade blur). The line repeats every 77 mm (3.0 inches).
B Horizontal scratches on the fuser sleeve
Solution
At the printer control panel, set CONFIGURE DEVICE/
PRINT QUALITY/OPTIMIZE/ PRE-ROTATION=ON.
See Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether a fuser sleeve is involved. If so, replace the fuser.
White horizontal line
If the line appears in a particular color, go to A. If it appears in full color, go to B.
Table 6-16 Causes for white horizontal lines
Cause Solution
A Horizontal scratches on the photosensitive drum
(cartridge)
B Horizontal scratches on the transfer unit
C The fuser sleeve is deformed by remaining engaged with the pressure roller for too long
See
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether a photosensitive drum is involved.
If so, replace the print cartridge.
Check the transfer unit surface for horizontal scratches.
If any, replace the transfer unit.
See
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether the fuser sleeve is involved. If so, replace the fuser.
Color missing
Table 6-17 Causes for a missing color
Cause
Defective laser shutter
Poor developing-bias contacts
Defective cartridge (primary-charging roller)
Laser/scanner unit is defective
High-voltage PCB is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Check the problem color laser shutter. Clean the shutter as necessary. Replace the shutter if it is deformed or damaged.
For the cartridge with the problem (color missing), check the developing-bias contacts to the high-voltage PCB.
Clean contacts, if dirty. Replace defective parts if the contacts are deformed or damaged.
Replace the problem (color missing) color cartridge.
Replace the laser/scanner for any missing color.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner.
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
ENWW Image defects 221
Blank spots
Table 6-18 Causes for blank spots
Cause
Poor secondary-transfer-bias contacts
High-voltage PCB is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
On the secondary-transfer roller, check the bias contacts to the high-voltage PCB. Clean the contacts as necessary. Replace any deformed or damaged contacts.
Replace the high-voltage PCB.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
Poor fusing
Table 6-19 Causes for poor fusing
Cause
Printer is not properly set for media type
Media is not within specifications
Fuser is not within nip-width specifications
Fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged
Pressure roller is scarred or damaged
Thermistor is deteriorated
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Check the media setting in the driver and in the control panel Set the printer for the media type being used.
Use media that meets specifications.
See
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine whether a fuser sleeve is involved. If so, replace the fuser sleeve unit.
Replace the fuser.
See
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine if a pressure roller is involved. If so, replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
Image distortion
Table 6-20 Causes for distortion or blurring
Cause
Transfer unit is defective
Secondary-transfer roller is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Replace the transfer unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the transfer unit.
If it does not rotate smoothly or is deformed, replace the secondary-transfer roller.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
222 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Color misregistration
If the misregistration occurs in a particular color, go to A. If it occurs in all colors, go to step B. If another misregistration issue is evident, perform the steps in order.
Table 6-21 Causes for color misregistration
Cause Solution
The printer is not calibrated correctly
A
B
Media is not within specifications.
Cartridge is defective
Cartridge drive gears are worn or chipped
Color misregistration sensor is dirty
Color misregistration sensor is defective
Transfer unit is defective
Drive gears are worn or chipped
Image drive unit is defective
Laser/scanner unit is defective
DC controller PCB is defective
Open the front door and remove the ETB shipping locks on each side of the ETB assembly, toward the bottom.
Calibrate the printer.
Verify that media meets specifications.
Check if the photosensitive drum in the problem cartridge rotates smoothly. If not, replace the cartridge.
Check the drive gears connected to the problem cartridge. If a gear is worn or chipped, replace the gear.
Clean the color misregistration sensor lens.
Replace the color misregistration sensor.
If the transfer unit does not rotate smoothly, replace it.
Check the drive gears between the image drive unit and the drum motor. If one is worn or chipped, replace it.
Replace the image drive unit.
Replace the laser/scanner unit.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Smearing
Table 6-22 Causes for smearing
Cause Solution
Poor contacts exist to each cartridge and printer grounding Use media that is within specifications.
Verify that the proper fuser mode is set.
Clean the grounding contacts on each cartridge and the printer. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Make sure that all contacts are connected correctly.
Reseat the lever to make the movement smooth.
The movement of the fuser front paper sensor lever is not smooth
Foreign substances or dirt on the fuser inlet guide Clean the fuser inlet guide.
ENWW Image defects 223
Misplaced image
Table 6-23 Causes for a misplaced image
Cause
The oblique rollers are worn (if problem only occurs on the back side of duplex printing only)
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Replace the oblique rollers.
Replace the DC controller PCB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller.
Reversed color
Table 6-24 Causes for reversed color
Cause
The FFC that connects the DC controller to the formatter is not correctly connected
DC controller PCB is defective
Solution
Reseat the FFC to the DC controller PCB J1001.
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Snail tracks
Table 6-25 Causes for snail tracks
Cause
This occurs in high-temperature, high-humidity environments on the second side of duplexing jobs when the fuser pressure roller is bent.
Solution
Use media that is within specifications.
Verify that the proper fuser mode is set.
See if the defect occurs when printing with light coverage. If so, reduce the toner coverage on the page.
Replace the fuser.
NOTE: This defect might be seen when using
A4 media in duplex mode.
NOTE: See the print modes in CONFIGURE DEVICE/ PRINT QUALITY/ PRINT MODES to associate each paper type with a specific print mode. For example, several “BEST” print modes can be set for a specific media type to enhance print quality. Results will vary, depending on the media being used.
See the OPTIMIZE setting for additional print-quality adjustments.
224 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Repetitive-defects troubleshooting
Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page. Use
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects on page 225
to determine which roller is causing the defect.
To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller. If the roller remains dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace it.
Repetitive defects for the transfer unit normally appear on every other page, because the transfer belt is longer than a page. However, the period of the repetitive defect can vary depending on the type of media, and a repetitive defect can occur more than once on the same page.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, use lint-free paper to clean the roller. If dirt is difficult to remove, dampen the paper with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Defects on the tray 2 pickup roller or the multipurpose-tray pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect, but instead cause a defect on the leading edge of the page.
Table 6-26 Causes of repetitive defects
Problem Area Period of defect (mm)
Problem
Primary charging roller
Developing cylinder
Registration roller (inside)
Registration roller (outside)
Transfer roller
Fuser sleeve
Photosensitive drum
Fuser pressure roller
About 27
About 27
About 35
About 36
About 44
About 75
About 76
About 79
X
X
X
X
X
X
Dirt on front
X
X
X
X
X
Blank spots
X
X
Dirt on back
X
Poor fuser
X
X
Repetitive print defects are usually caused by a specific roller, cylinder, or drum in the printer or the print cartridge. Use the following figure to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the “ruler” (at the top or bottom of the misprinted page), and measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine which roller, cylinder, or drum is causing the defect. When the defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the indicated part.
ENWW Repetitive-defects troubleshooting 225
First occurrence 0mm
Primary charging roller 27mm
Developing cylinder 27mm
Registration roller (inside) 35mm
Registration roller (outside) 36mm
Transfer roller (inside) 44mm
Fuser sleeve 75mm
Photo sensitive drum 76mm
Fuser pressure roller 79mm
Figure 6-2 Repetitive defect ruler
NOTE: Transfer unit defects usually appear on every other page because the transfer belt is longer than a page. However, the defect distance might vary depending on the type of media that is being used. It is possible to see a repetitive defect more than once on the same page.
226 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Interface troubleshooting
Communication checks
NOTE: Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty.
Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.
If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, use the following table to check the connection.
Table 6-27 Communication check
Check Action
Does the computer configuration match the parameters described in the configuration instructions?
Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications port matches these parameters. View the Jetdirect configuration page for print server status, and to verify configuration parameters for operation on your network.
NOTE: If these parameters are not set correctly, an error message might appear on the control panel.
EIO troubleshooting
If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify the operation of the print server. Print a configuration page. If the
Jetdirect card does not appear under “Installed personalities and options” on the configuration page, see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide supplied with the print server.
If the host system and printer still do not communicate, replace the formatter PCB or the EIO card and reconfigure the printer. If the problem persists, use a protocol analyzer to find the source of the problem.
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch-box products that do not have surge protection. These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCB. This circumstance is not covered under the Hewlett-Packard warranty.
ENWW Interface troubleshooting 227
Service menu
Using the Service menu
The Service menu is PIN protected for added security. Only authorized service technicians have access to the Service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to type your 8-digit PIN number. The following are the appropriate PIN numbers:
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printers: 11300005
HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printers: 11360005
HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printers: 11380005
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printers: 06350507
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight SERVICE, and then press .
3.
Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
4.
Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk.
Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all eight digits are typed.
Clear event log
Use this item to clear the printer internal event log.
Total page count
The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. The page count is in two categories: total mono pages and total color pages.
Serial number
If you replace the formatter, use this item to reset the serial number of the printer.
228 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Diagnostics menu
Menu item Description
PRINT EVENT LOG Prints an event log that shows the last 50 entries in the printer event log, starting with the most recent.
Shows the last 50 printer events on the control-panel display, starting with the most recent.
SHOW EVENT LOG
PQ
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prints a series of print-quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot many print-quality problems.
PRINT
DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
Prints the diagnostics page.
DISABLE
CARTRIDGE CHECK
PAPER PATH
SENSORS
PAPER PATH TEST
Prints with one or more cartridges removed so that you can diagnose print cartridge-related problems.
Shows the values of the sensors. Values are updated as media passes each sensor. Jobs can be initiated from the control panel or sent from the computer.
Tests the printer paper-handling features, such as the configuration of the trays.
Tests the paper-path sensors and switches for correct operation.
MANUAL SENSOR
TEST
COMPONENT TEST
PRINT/STOP TEST
Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, and other hardware issues.
Isolates print-quality issues more accurately by stopping the printer in mid-print cycle. Stopping the printer in mid-print cycle causes a jam that might need to be removed manually. Only a service representative should perform this test.
ENWW Diagnostics menu 229
Diagnostics
The following section describes the printer's diagnostics.
LED diagnostics
Use the following procedure to help identify the cause of high-level printer problems. These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer's power-on sequence. The LED that the procedure refers to is on the formatter. This is the “heartbeat” LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating correctly.
Does the LED blink with four fast bursts at power on? If not, then perform the following checks:
● Check the firmware.
● Check the memory.
● Check the formatter.
Does the LED blink at a fast, steady rate during memory testing (one blink per 8 MB)? If not, then perform the following checks:
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
● Check the memory.
● Check the formatter.
Is the LED off for about eight seconds, while the boot code is decompressing, before the display turns on? If not, then perform the following checks:
● Check the firmware.
● Check the control-panel display for correct connections and operation.
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
Does the LED blink at a steady rate of one blink per second? If not, then perform the following checks:
● Check the firmware.
● Check the formatter.
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
If the control-panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine. You must have media loaded in tray 2 for the engine test.
Diagnostics mode
Some of the diagnostics tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode. During the special diagnostics mode the printer performs actions that normally cause the printer to enter an error state. Always follow the control panel directions in the DIAGNOSTICS menu to exit the special diagnostics mode correctly and return the printer to a normal state.
230 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode
Four diagnostics tests put the engine into a special state:
● Disable cartridge check
● Sensor test
● Manual sensor test
● Component test
While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, the following message should appear:
READY DIAGNOSTICS MODE
TO EXIT PRESS STOP KEY
When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, these four tests appear in the menu and are available to be run. To gain access into other diagnostic tests or to leave the special state, press
Stop , and then select Exit. The printer resets itself, and then returns to the normal state.
NOTE: You need to have a good understanding of how the printer operates in order to use the engine diagnostics successfully. Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests, make sure that you understand the information in chapter 4 of this manual.
Diagnostic tests
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers. Removing the covers provides a better view of the areas that are being tested. To operate the printer with the covers removed, the door switch lever
(SW1, callout 1) must be depressed (this is the door-closed position).
WARNING!
Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid the risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed.
Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on.
ENWW Diagnostics 231
1
Figure 6-3 Door switch and fuser interlock
NOTE: Any time that a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the door switch and fuser interlock are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually.
Individual diagnostic tests
The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics correctly.
Print the event log page
The event log lists the printer events, including jams, service errors, and other printer conditions.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG, and then press .
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
View the event log on the control-panel display
The event log lists the last 50 printer events on the control-panel display. (The most recent event is listed first.)
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG, and then press .
232 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Print the print-quality (PQ) troubleshooting pages
The PQ troubleshooting pages are print-quality assessment pages that you can use to troubleshoot print-quality problems. Follow the instructions on the first page of the print-quality troubleshooting pages to solve print-quality problems.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING, and then press .
The message PRINTING... PQ TROUBLESHOOTING appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages.
Disable cartridge check (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Because the cartridges are not keyed, the diagnostic test can be run when one to four cartridges have been removed or moved to another location (exchanged). Consumable supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.
When the printer is in this mode, you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer. This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems, such as noise.
NOTE: Any time that a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the door switch and fuser interlock are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK, and then press .
To exit this diagnostic test, press Stop and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.
Paper-path sensor test
This test shows the status of each paper-path sensor.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PAPER PATH SENSORS, and then press .
4.
Print an internal page, and observe the status of the sensors as the page moves through the printer.
Paper-path test
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.
ENWW Diagnostics 233
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Print multiple copies to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:
● PRINT TEST PAGE. Run the paper-path test from the default settings: tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test.
● SOURCE. Select tray 1, tray 2, or optional tray 3.
● DUPLEX. Enable or disable 2-sided printing.
● COPIES. Select the number of sheets to use during the test.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST, and then press .
4.
Select the paper-path test options when the printer prompts you.
Manual sensor test (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to test the printer sensors and switches.
NOTE: To eliminate the flickering on the control-panel display during this test, leave the door switch in the open state.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST, and then press .
To exit this diagnostic, press the Stop button, and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so serves the same function as the Stop button.
To toggle a sensor, find and move the sensor flags in the following locations.
Table 6–28 shows how these letter designations correspond to the paper-path sensors. For a diagram that shows the physical location of these sensors, see
Sensors in the pickup-and-feed system trays (cassettes) on page 56 .
NOTE: Sensor P is only present when the optional 500-sheet feeder is attached.
234 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
G
I
H
A
B
C
D
Table 6-28 Manual sensor test
E
F
J
K
L
M
Name Symbol
Top-of-page sensor
Paper loop sensor
N/A
Fuser paper delivery sensor
SR710
SR6001
N/A
SR6005
Delivery-tray paperfull sensor
Fuser pressurerelease sensor
Media sensor
SR706
SR705
N/A
Multipurpose tray paper sensor
J7007
Cassette paper sensor SR709
Door open detection switch
SW1
Developing estrangement sensor
(Yellow, magenta, and cyan)
Developing estrangement sensor
(Black)
N/A
SR707
SR712
SR711
Paper-path sensors
1 Manual sensor test 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0 or 1
0 or 1
N/A
N/A
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
N Multipurpose tray media-position sensor
SR708
Duplex reverse sensor SR823
N/A 0 or 1
O 0 or 1 0 or 1
1
2
P Paper present sensor SR4013 N/A 0 or 1
0 = off; 1 = on
0 = unknown media; 1 = normal media; 3 = overhead transparency; 4 = glossy; 5 = glossy film; 6 = heavy media; 7 = light media
Component test (special mode test)
Use the component test to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If CONTINUOUS is selected from the drop-down menu as the repeat option, the test will cycle the component on and off. This process continues for 2 minutes, and then the test ends.
ENWW Diagnostics 235
NOTE: The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests. If covers are removed, the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change. The ETB assembly can be open, closed, or removed while some of these tests are executing. Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests. The control-panel display prompts for the removal of some or all of the cartridges during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components, and to protect the cartridges and ETB.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4.
Select the component test options when the printer prompts you.
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so serves the same function as the Stop button.
You can perform the following component tests:
● Transfer motors. This test turns the components that are involved in the image-transfer process: the cartridge motors, the ETB motor and belt, and the print cartridges (if the ETB is closed). You can remove or install print cartridges during this test.
● Belt only. This test turns only the ETB motor and belt. The control-panel display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them also rotating the drums. Rotating the photosensitive drums can damage the belt or photosensitive drums. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to run the test.
● Cartridge motors. This test rotates only the print-cartridge drive motors. The control-panel display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without also rotating the drums. The engine rotates the cartridge motor(s) for only the cartridges that are removed. To rotate all motors sequentially, remove all of the cartridges; to isolate one motor, remove only that cartridge. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to perform the test. Always start this test with all of the cartridges installed, and activate the door switch so that the printer recognizes the configuration. Then you can proceed with the test by removing one or more cartridges.
● Black, Magenta, Yellow, Cyan laser/scanners. Use these tests to rotate each scanner motor individually.
● Fuser motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser motor and drive gears.
● Fuser pressure release motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser pressure-release motor.
● Alienation motor (also called the developing disengaging motor). This test moves the developing disengaging motor, clutches and gears, and plates through their positions.
● ETB contact/alienation. This test activates the ETB motors and solenoid.
● Tray 1 pickup solenoid. This test activates and releases the multipurpose tray (tray 1) pickup solenoid.
● Tray 2 pickup motor. This test activates and moves the tray 2 pickup motor and gear train.
236 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
● Tray 2 pickup solenoid. This test activates and releases the tray 2 pickup solenoid.
● Tray 3 pickup motors and solenoids. These tests run the same way as the tray 2 pickup motor and solenoid test.
NOTE: You must have the tray partially installed or must manually lift the pickup roller assembly/lifter plate.
● Duplexer pickup motor. This test activates and moves the duplexer pickup motor.
Print/Stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams in the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job print time, you can recover the printer the following ways:
● After the print job is complete, press Stop to return to the DIAGNOSTICS menu before the timer times out.
● After the timer times out, press Stop . Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.
When the timer trips, the message Printing stopped Press to continue appears on the controlpanel display. Press Menu to print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press Stop and then press Menu .
NOTE: Do not attempt to perform a Print/Stop test while the printer is calibrating because you will be required to turn the printer off and then on again. If a jam message appears on the control-panel display during testing, activate the door switch.
ENWW Diagnostics 237
Test pages
Engine test page
Print an engine test page to make sure that the printer is functioning. Use a small, pointed object to depress the test-page switch on the back of the printer.
Figure 6-4 Engine test page
Formatter test
Print a configuration page to make sure that the formatter is functioning.
1.
Press Menu to open the MENUS.
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press .
Half-self test
Perform a half-self test to determine which stage of the print process is malfunctioning.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Press to highlight INFORMATION, and then press .
3.
Press to highlight PRINT DEMO, and then press to print a demo page.
4.
Open the front cover when the leading edge of the paper exits the printer.
5.
Remove the print cartridges.
6.
Open the print-cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, then the two functions of the electrophotographic process are
238 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
functioning (image-formation and development). Any failure is occurring in the transfer or fusing stage.
Drum-rotation test
The photosensitive drum, located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main motor through a system of gears on the right side of the printer.
NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges have been used.
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Remove the print cartridges.
3.
Mark the drive gear on the cartridge with a felt-tipped marker. Make note of the position of the mark.
4.
Install the print cartridges and close the front door. The startup sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark.
5.
Open the front door and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved.
If the mark did not move, inspect the drive shaft that moves into the print-cartridge area when the front door is closed to make sure that it is meshing with the print cartridge. If the drive shaft looks functional and the drum does not move, then replace the print cartridge. If the drive shaft is damaged, then replace the printer.
ENWW Test pages 239
Engine resets
Use the following information to perform system-wide reset procedures. Customers do not have access to this information.
Engine resets
Cold reset
A cold reset unlocks menus that have been previously locked and resets all control-panel menu items to the factory defaults. A cold reset does not clear the values in the Service menu, such as the serial number and the page counts.
NOTE: Before performing a cold reset, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset customer-specific settings.
CAUTION: All HP Jetdirect settings are also reset. Be sure to print a configuration page before performing a cold reset. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. You might need to restore the IP address after performing a cold reset.
To perform a cold reset
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
When the printer begins its initialization sequence, press and hold until all LEDs are lit.
3.
Press until COLD RESET appears, and then press .
NVRAM initialization
CAUTION: All HP Jetdirect settings are also reset. Be sure to print a configuration page before performing an NVRAM initialization. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the
Jetdirect configuration page. You need to restore the IP address after performing an NVRAM initialization.
Performing an NVRAM initialization resets the following settings and information:
● All menu settings are reset to factory default values.
● All localization settings, including language and country/region, are reset.
After performing an NVRAM initialization, reconfigure any computers that print to this printer so that the computers can recognize the printer.
To perform an NVRAM initialization
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
When the printer begins its initialization sequence, press and hold until all LEDs are lit.
3.
Press one time, and then press Menu .
4.
Press until NVRAM INIT appears, and then press .
240 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Hard-disk initialization
A hard-disk initialization erases and reformats the hard disk. Perform a hard-disk initialization only if an error message on the control panel indicates a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it.
NOTE: Before performing a hard-disk initialization, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset any customer-specific settings.
To perform a hard-disk initialization
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
When the printer begins its initialization sequence, press and hold Menu until all LEDs are lit.
3.
Press one time. INITIALIZE DISK appears on the control-panel display.
4.
Press one time. A series of asterisks appears on the control-panel display. Wait for the printer to complete its initialization sequence.
ENWW Engine resets 241
Service ID
When printing from an HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800/CP3505 Series printer, this information appears on the configuration page, which eliminates the need for customers to keep paper receipts for proof of the warranty. Because the printer has an internal clock, the availability of the service ID date depends on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date, in this case a time server that is on the same network as the printer. When the printer is not connected to a date source, the service ID is not available, and 00000 appears on the configuration page.
Converting the Service ID to an actual date
You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty.
Use the following procedure to convert the Service ID into the installation date.
1.
Add 1990 to YY to determine the actual year that the printer was installed.
2.
Divide DDD by 30 (and, if there is a remainder, add 1 to the quotient) to determine the month the printer was installed.
3.
The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the day of the month. If no remainder resulted from the calculation in step 2, then the day of the month is the 30th.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1.
12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2.
287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Add 1 to 9 to get 10, so the month is October.
3.
The remainder (from the above calculation) is 17, so that is the day of the month.
4.
The complete date is 17-October-2002.
A 6-day grace period is built into the date system.
Restoring the Service ID
If you replace the formatter, the Service ID is lost and must be restored. Use this menu item to reset the Service ID, which is calculated based on the date the printer was first used. The date format is
YYDDD. Use the following procedure to calculate the Service ID.
1.
To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year.
2.
To calculate DDD, use the following formula: 30 * (calendar month – 1) + calendar day = DDD.
(If the calendar day is 31, use 30 instead.)
Using October 17, 2002, as the date the printer was first used, the service ID conversion is as follows: a.
2002 minus 1990 = 12, so YY = 12.
b.
10 minus 1 (calendar month minus 1) = 9.
c.
9 times 30 = 270.
d.
270 plus 17 (the calendar day) = 287, so DDD = 287.
e.
The complete service ID number is 12287.
242 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Troubleshooting diagrams
The diagrams in this section include connector locations, DC controller connectors, major assembly locations, printer timing, and printed circuit block diagrams.
Connector locations
Use these diagrams to identify connector locations.
Figure 6-5 Printer connector locations
ENWW Service ID 243
Figure 6-6 500-sheet tray connector locations
244 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Major assemblies
Use this diagram to identify major assemblies in the printer.
1
2
3 4
6
Figure 6-7 Major assemblies (1 of 5)
1.
Fuser drive assembly
2.
Developing-separation drive assembly
3.
Pickup drive assembly
4.
Laser/scanner assembly
5.
Pickup-and-feed assembly
6.
Main drive assembly
ENWW Service ID 245
1
2 3 4 6
10
11
12
13
8
7
9
Figure 6-8 Major assemblies (2 of 5)
1.
Main fan
2.
Fuser drive motor
3.
Print cartridge drive motors (M6, M7, M8, M9)
4.
Pickup-and-feed motor (M4)
5.
Developing separation solenoids (SL5014 and SL5015)
6.
ETB drive motor (M5)
7.
Developing separation solenoid (SL5011)
8.
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5012)
9.
Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL5013)
10.
Duplex reverse-drive motor
11.
Duplex flapper solenoid (SL10)
12.
Duplex-feed-drive motor (M11)
13.
Door fan (duplex models only)
246 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
1
4
2
3
Figure 6-9 Major assemblies (3 of 5)
1.
Cartridge sensor assembly
2.
Paper and registration sensor covers
3.
Cassette media sensor (HP Color LaserJet 3600, 3800, and CP3505 only)
4.
Temperature sensor
5.
Media sensor assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Service ID 247
Figure 6-10 Major assemblies (4 of 5)
1.
Duplex-reverse-drive assembly
2.
Duplex-delivery-drive assembly
3.
Duplex-feed-drive assembly
4.
Position guide and duplex paper-feed assemblies
1
2
3
4
248 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
1
2
3
Figure 6-11 Major assemblies (5 of 5)
1.
Low-voltage power supply
2.
DC controller PCA
3.
High-voltage power supply
4.
Memory-controller PCA
5.
Driver PCA
6.
Control panel
7.
Duplex-driver PCA
7
6
4
Service ID 249
DC controller connectors
This diagram shows the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
J1005 J1002 J1006
J1004
J1024
J1014
J1023
J1022
J1020
Figure 6-12 DC controller connectors
J1019
J1009
J1018
J1021
250 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Timing diagram
ENWW
Figure 6-13 Timing diagram (HP LaserJet 3000/3800/CP3505)
Service ID 251
Figure 6-14 Timing diagram (HP LaserJet 3600)
252 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
Circuit diagrams
The following diagrams show the printer circuits.
ENWW Service ID 253
Figure 6-15 General circuit diagram (1 of 2)
254 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 6-16 General circuit diagram (2 of 2)
Service ID 255
256 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ENWW
7 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
●
Ordering parts and supplies
●
External panels and covers
●
Internal components
●
Paper-pickup drive assembly
●
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
●
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
●
Developing separation-drive assembly
●
Fuser drive assembly
●
Cassette (tray 2)
●
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
●
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
●
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
●
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
●
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
●
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
●
Fuser
●
PCAs
●
500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3)
●
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
●
500-sheet feeder PCA
●
Alphabetical parts list
●
Numerical parts list
257
Ordering parts and supplies
This section describes Web resources for ordering parts and for technical support and resources for ordering related documentation and software.
Parts
Order replacement parts from the following Web sites:
● http://www.hp.com/ssg/parts/direct_order.html
● HP Parts Store: http://www.hp.com/buy/parts
● Partsurfer: http://partsurfer.hp.com
● HP Parts Portal: http://www.hp.com/go/HPparts
How to use the parts lists and diagrams
The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded-view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU).
CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model.
NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit board assembly.” components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
Types of screws
Illustration Description
Screw w/washer
Size
M3X8
Part Number
XA9–1420–000CN
Screw, RS M3X6
M3X10
XA9–1499–000CN
Use
Used to secure metal components to metal components (for example, a ground wire to the frame)
Used to secure metal to metal
Screw, tapping, truss head
M4X10 XB4–7401–000CN Used to secure anything to plastic
258 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Related documentation and software
Table 7-1 Technical support Web sites
HP Customer Care Online
Software drivers, support documentation, and answers to frequently asked questions
HP Technical Training (North America)
Classes and schedules http://www.hp.com/go/support http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Accessories and supplies
Table 7-2 Accessories and supplies
Item Part number
Memory (DIMMs)
(HP Color LaserJet
3000/3800/CP3505
Series only)
Q7721A
Q7722A
Q7723A
500-sheet feeder (tray
3)
Q5985A
Service/exchange number
Q7721-67951
Q7722-67951
Q7723-67951
Q5985-67901
Description
Synchronous 128 MB
DDR SDRAM DIMM
Synchronous 256 MB
DDR SDRAM DIMM
Synchronous 512 MB
DDR SDRAM DIMM
Optional accessory
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 259
Table 7-2 Accessories and supplies (continued)
Item Part number Service/exchange number
Internal (EIO) connectivity for the
HP Color LaserJet
3000, 3800, and
CP3505 Series printers
J6073A
J7934A
J7960A
J7961A
J7972G
J6035D/G
J7942A
J7951A
Printer supplies for the HP Color LaserJet
3000 Series printer
Printer supplies for the HP Color LaserJet
3600 Series printer
Printer supplies for the HP Color LaserJet
3800 and CP3505
Series printers
Cable
Q7560A
Q7561A
Q7562A
Q7563A
Q6470A
Q6471A
Q6472A
Q6473A
Q6470A
Q7581A
Q7582A
Q7583A
C6518A
Q7560-67901
Q7561-67901
Q7562-67901
Q7563-67901
Q6470-67901
Q6471-67901
Q6472-67901
Q6473-67901
Q6470-67901
Q7581-67901
Q7582-67901
Q7583-67901
Description
HP EIO highperformance hard disk
HP Jetdirect 620n print server (10/100-
TX Ethernet)
HP Jetdirect 625n print server
(10/100/1000T
Ethernet)
HP Jetdirect 635n
IPv6/IPsec/Gigabit print server
HP 1284 parallel card
HP Jetdirect 175x print server (fast
Ethernet, value feature set, 10/100-
TX, USB 1.1)
HP Jetdirect en3700 print server (fast
Ethernet, 10/100-TX,
USB 2.0)
HP Jetdirect ew2400 wired/wireless print server (fast Ethernet, value feature set,
USB 2.0)
Black print cartridge
Cyan print cartridge
Yellow print cartridge
Magenta print cartridge
Black print cartridge
Cyan print cartridge
Yellow print cartridge
Magenta print cartridge
Black print cartridge
Cyan print cartridge
Yellow print cartridge
Magenta print cartridge
USB 2.0 printer cable
(2-meter [6.5-feet] standard)
260 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2 Accessories and supplies (continued)
Item Part number Service/exchange number
Media C2934A
C2936A
Q2419A
C4179A
C4179B
Q1298A
Q1298B
HPU1132
CHP410
HPJ1124
CHP310
Reference, service, and training materials
5851-1468
5021-0337
Description
50 sheets
HP Color LaserJet
Transparencies (letter)
50 sheets
HP Color LaserJet
Transparencies (A4)
50 sheets
HP LaserJet High
Gloss paper (letter)
200 sheets
HP LaserJet High
Gloss paper (letter)
200 sheets
HP LaserJet High
Gloss paper (A4)
HP LaserJet Tough paper (letter)
HP LaserJet Tough paper (A4)
HP Premium Choice
LaserJet paper (letter)
HP Premium Choice
LaserJet paper (A4)
HP LaserJet paper
(letter)
HP LaserJet paper
(A4)
HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media
Specification Guide
PCL/PLJ Technical
Reference Package
For downloadable versions, go to http://www.hp.com/ support/clj3000 , http://www.hp.com/ support/clj3600 , http://www.hp.com/ support/clj3800 , or http://www.hp.com/ support/cljcp3505 .
When connected, select Manuals.
Ordering parts and supplies 261
Table 7-2 Accessories and supplies (continued)
Item Part number Service/exchange number
Assembly, service, and training CD
Q5982-60114
Service manual (this manual)
Control-panel overlays
(HP Color LaserJet
3000 Series only)
Control-panel overlays
(HP Color LaserJet
3600/3800/CP3505
Series only)
Q5982-90970
Q7533-60112
Q7533-60113
Q7533-60114
Q7533-60115
Q5982-60107
Q5982-60108
Q5982-60109
Q5982-60110
Q5982-60111
Formatter
HP Color
LaserJet 3000 Series
Q5982-67907
Q5982-67908
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69002
Formatter
HP Color
LaserJet 3800 Series
Q5982-67907
Q5982-67908
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69002
Formatter
HP Color
LaserJet CP3505
Series
CB441-67901
CB441-69001
Description
CD based service and training information
(English)
Printed copy of this manual
German, French,
Italian
Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Catalan
Finnish, Norwegian,
Swedish, Slovak
Czech, Hungarian,
Polish
French, Spanish,
Portuguese
German, French,
Italian
Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Catalan
Finnish, Norwegian,
Swedish, Slovak
Czech, Hungarian,
Polish base and N models
(new) base and N models
(exchange)
DN and DTN models
(new)
DN and DTN models
(exchange) base and N models
(new) base and N models
(exchange)
DN and DTN models
(new)
DN and DTN models
(exchange) new exchange
262 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-2 Accessories and supplies (continued)
Item Part number Service/exchange number
Q5987-67901 I controller (formatter)
HP Color
LaserJet 3600 Series only
Power cord 8120–5301
Description
I controller
Power cord, OPT-903
3-COND 1.9-M-LG
ROHS (110v)
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 263
External panels and covers
See front-cover assembly
Simplex model or Duplex model
See Multipurpose tray (tray1)
Figure 7-1 External panels and covers (1 of 2)
264 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-3 External panels and covers (1 of 2)
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
8
11
16
Description
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge left
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge right
Spring, tension
Cover, left
Cover, multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Cover, cassette rear right (hinge)
Cover, cassette rear left
Cover, rear lower
Cover, right
Multipurpose tray (tray 1) extension tray assembly
Part number
RC1-6381-000CN
RC1-6382-000CN
RC1-6383-000CN
RC1-6687-000CN
RC1-6690-000CN
RC1-6691-000CN
RC1-6792-000CN
RC1-7550-000CN
RM1–2669–000CN
RM1-2710-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
2
Qty
1
1
1
1
ENWW External panels and covers 265
Figure 7-2 External panels and covers (2 of 2)
266 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-4 External panels, and covers (2 of 2)
20
21
22
15B
17
17
19
14A
14B
15
15A
Ref
12
13
14
Description
Interlock-switch assembly
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (simplex models)
Top-cover assembly (simplex models)
Cable, paper-full (simplex models)
Connector, snap-tight (simplex models)
Top-cover assembly (duplex models)
Cable, paper-full (duplex models)
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (duplex models)
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
Torsion spring
Simplex page-delivery flay
Duplex page, duplex flag
Part number
RM1-2670-000CN
RM1-2671-000CN
RM1-2672-030CN
RM1-2630-000CN
VS1-7207-003CN
RM1-2713-020CN
RM1-2620-000CN
RM1-2714-000CN
RM1-2777-020CN
RM1-2750-020CN
RM1-2617-000CN
RC1-7628-000CN
RC1-6286-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW External panels and covers 267
Figure 7-3 Front-cover assembly (simplex model)
268 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-5 Front-cover assembly (simplex model)
Ref
All
Description
Front-cover assembly (simplex models)
Part number
RM1-2673-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW External panels and covers 269
Figure 7-4 Front-cover assembly (duplex model)
270 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-6 Front-cover assembly (duplex model)
Ref
All
1
Description
Front-cover assembly (duplex models)
Fan (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2715-000CN
RK2-0954-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW External panels and covers 271
Internal components
Figure 7-5 Internal components (1 of 5)
272 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
34
39
40
43
29
30
31
33
Table 7-7 Internal components (1 of 5)
14
15
16
18
9
10
12
13
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
20
21
23
24
25
26
26A
Description
Holder, fan
Duct, fan
Lever lock, left
Spring, tension
Lever, lock slide, left
Lever, lock slide, right
Cam, slide, right
Lever, lock, left upper
Cover, slide plate, right
Spring, grounding
Fan
Lever, lock, right
Spring, grounding
Spring, tension
Guide, cartridge, left
Gear, 58T
Bushing
Gear, 29T
Cartridge, guide, right assembly
RC1–6571-000CN
RC1-6573-000CN
RC1-6575-000CN
RM1-2771-000CN
Contact-holder assembly RM1-2683-000CN
Media-sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) RM1-2756-000CN
Cable, media sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505)
RM1-2589-000CN
Guide, duplexing external (duplex models)
Cover, guide crossmember
Spring, tension
Latch, left
Latch, right
Duct, 2
Duct, 3
Cable, panel
RC1-6744-000CN
RC1-6795-000CN
RC1-7552-000CN
RC1-7554-000CN
RC1-7555-000CN
RC1-7547-000CN
RC1-7548-000CN
RM1-2596-000CN
Part number
RC1-6631-000CN
RC1-6632-000CN
RC1-6633-000CN
RC1-6634-000CN
RC1-6636-000CN
RC1-6643-000CN
RC1-6645-000CN
RC1-7618-000CN
RC1-6824-000CN
RC1-7583-000CN
RK2-0954-000CN
RC1-6640-000CN
RC1-6641-000CN
RC1-6677-000CN
RC1-6629-000CN
4
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
3
Qty
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Internal components 273
Figure 7-6 Internal components (2 of 5)
274 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
26
27
29
30
Table 7-8 Internal components (2 of 5)
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
20
21
23
24
9
10
11
12
7
8
Ref
6
25
Description
Cam, gear. 48T
Gear, 41T
Gear, 19T/30T
Gear, 31T
Gear, 17T/41T
Flag, developing estrangement (developing separation)
Cover, crossmember, upper
Guide, cable, right 1
Bushing
Guide, cable, right 3
Guide, cable, right 4
Crossmember, drive side plate
Cover, shutter, left
Holder, toner cartridge
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, scanner flat short
Cable, scanner
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505: K, Y, C, M cartridges; HP CLJ 3000: Y, C, M cartridges only)
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3000: K cartridge only)
Lever, sensing
Spring, tension
Cable, memory tag
Main drive assembly
Part number
RC1-6584-000CN
RC1-6589-000CN
RC1-6593-000CN
RC1-6594-000CN
RC1-6596-000CN
RC1-6605-000CN
RC1-6668-000CN
RC1-6682-000CN
RC1-6823-000CN
RC1-7544-000CN
RC1-7545-000CN
RC1-7576-000CN
RC1-6651-000CN
RC1-6771-000CN
RK2-0971-000CN
RK2-0966-000CN
RK2-0967-000CN
RM1-2594-000CN
RM1-2689-000CN
RM1-2773-000CN
RC1-7597-000CN
RC1-7598-000CN
RM1-2627-000CN
RM1-2751-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
Qty
4
Internal components 275
Figure 7-7 Internal components (3 of 5)
276 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-9 Internal components (3 of 5)
32
33
34
25
26
28
28A
10
11
16
24
7
8
5
6
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Cover, gear
Guide, cassette front, left
Guide, cassette front, right
Cam, slide, left
Rod, link, left
Rod, link, right
Foot, rear
Holder, ETB, left
Holder, ETB, right
Mount, hinge, left
Cable, duplex docking
Motor, AC 24V, 9W
Cable, sensor
Right-rear base assembly
Cassette sensor PCA
Plate, gear 3
Foot, rubber assembly, front
Plate lock release
Part number
RC1-6405-000CN
RC1-6499-000CN
RC1-6502-000CN
RC1-6638-000CN
RC1-6639-000CN
RC1-6646-000CN
RC1-6650-000CN
RC1-6673-000CN
RC1-6674-000CN
RC1-6684-000CN
RM1-2609-000CN
RK2-0939-000CN
RM1-2603-000CN
RM1-2678-000CN
RM1-2576-000CN
RL1-1069-000CN
RL1-1067-000CN
RC1-6833-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Internal components 277
Figure 7-8 Internal components (4 of 5)
278 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-10 Internal components (4 of 5)
14
15
16
17
8
9
12
13
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
17
18
21
23
24
24
Description
Holder, drawer connector
Holder, drawer
Guide, cable, left
Arm, switch-link
Guide, flexible flat cable 1
Guide, flexible flat cable 2
Guard, cable
Bracket, left, rear
Sensor, temperature
Cable, environment sensor
Cable, ETB
Cable, drum motor
Cable, solenoid
Cable, cassette
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, paper-full
Fuser cable assembly
Cable, drive power
Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Part number
RC1-6652-000CN
RC1-6653-000CN
RC1-6681-000CN
RC1-6700-000CN
RC1-6772-000CN
RC1-6773-000CN
RC1-6825-000CN
RC1-7551-000CN
WP2-5214-000CN
RM1-2595-000CN
RM1-2608-000CN
RM1-2610-000Cn
RM1-2611-000CN
RM1-2613-000CN
RM1-2629-000CN
RM1-2614-000CN
RM1-2628-000CN
RM1-2597-000CN
RM1-2605-000CN
RM1-2952-000CN
RM1-2640-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Internal components 279
9
See paper-pickup assembly
Figure 7-9 Internal components (5 of 5)
280 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-11 Internal components (5 of 5)
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
14
9
9
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Cover, rear
Cover
Cable, drive flat 1
Cable, drive flat 2
Duct 1
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3000 only)
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505 only)
Cable, panel connecting
Cable, power control
Cable, clamp
Multipurpose tray paper-pickup gear assembly
Shield, PCA
Cover, connector
Cover, paper sensor
Cover, registration sensor
Part number
RC1-6627-000CN
RC1-7577-000CN
RK2-0969-000CN
RK2-0970-000CN
RC1-7546-000CN
RM1-2582-000CN
RM1-2632-000CN
RM1-2587-000CN
RM1-2592-000CN
WT2-5944-000CN
RM1-2704-000CN
RC1-7599-000CN
RC1-6607-000CN
RC1-6611-000CN
RC1-6612-000CN
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 281
Paper-pickup drive assembly
Figure 7-10 Paper-pickup drive assembly
282 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-12 Paper-pickup drive assembly
Ref
All
Description
Paper-pickup drive assembly
Part number
RM1-2679-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW Paper-pickup drive assembly 283
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
Figure 7-11 Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
284 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-13 Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
Ref
All
Description
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2720-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models) 285
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
Figure 7-12 Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
286 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-14 Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
1
2
Ref
All
Description
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
Cable, duplexing sensor (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2721-000CN
RM1-2616-000CN
RM1-2618-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) 287
Developing separation-drive assembly
Figure 7-13 Developing separation-drive assembly
288 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-15 Developing separation-drive assembly
Ref
All
Description
Developing separation (estrangement) drive assembly
Part number
RM1-2687-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW Developing separation-drive assembly 289
Fuser drive assembly
Figure 7-14 Fuser drive assembly
290 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-16 Fuser drive assembly
Ref
All
1
Description
Fuser drive assembly
Cable, fuser drive
Part number
RM1-2668-000CN
RM1-2619-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW Fuser drive assembly 291
Cassette (tray 2)
Figure 7-15 Cassette (tray 2)
292 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-17 Cassette (tray 2)
Ref
All
6
25
NA
Description
Cassette, 250-sheet
Cover, cassette, front
Separation-pad assembly
Lift plate activator
Part number
RM1-2705-000CN
RC1-6491-000CN
RM1-2709-000CN
RC1-6833-020CN
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW Cassette (tray 2) 293
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Figure 7-16 Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
294 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-18 Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
3
4
1
2
Ref
All
Description
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Multipurpose tray roller (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cover, cassette roller assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cassette
Multipurpose tray separation-pad assembly (HP CLJ
3600/3800/CP3505)
Part number
RM1-2755-000CN
RM1-2741-000CN
RC1-6609-000CN
RM1-2702-000CN
RM1-2699-000CN
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) 295
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Figure 7-17 Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
296 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-19 Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
9
10
11
12
7
8
Ref
All
18
25
26
Description
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Spring, tension (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Pre-registration rachet (HP CLJ 3000)
Spring, compression (HP CLJ 3000)
Gear, 18T (HP CLJ 3000)
Preregistration-guide assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Block, Multipurpose path (HP CLJ 3000)
Media sensor case
Part number
RM1-2774-000CN
RC1-6516-000CN
RC1-6517-000CN
RC1-6518-000CN
RC1-6444-000CN
RC1-6520-000CN
RC1-6521-000CN
RM1-2775-000CN
RC1-7959-000CN
RC1-6394-000CN
1
1
1
1
2
1
Qty
1
1
1
ENWW Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000) 297
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
Figure 7-18 Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
298 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-20 Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
Ref
All
6
Description
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
Motor, DC (ETB) (simplex models)
Part number
RM1-2759-000CN
RK2-0937-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW Electronic transfer belt (simplex models) 299
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
See electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
Figure 7-19 Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
300 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-21 Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
Ref
All
Description
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2752-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW Electronic transfer belt (duplex models) 301
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Figure 7-20 Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
302 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-22 Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Ref
All
Description
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Part number
RM1-2711-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1) 303
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
Figure 7-21 Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
304 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-23 Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
2
3
Ref
1
4
Description
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
Position-guide assembly (duplex models)
Lower guide assembly (duplex models)
Duplex-output bin full flag
Part number
RM1-2718-000CN
RM1-2719-000CN
RM1-2722-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models) 305
Fuser
Figure 7-22 Fuser
306 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-24 Fuser
Ref
All
All
Description
Fuser assembly 110V-127V
Fuser assembly 220V-240V
Part number
RM1-2665-000CN
RM1-2743-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW Fuser 307
PCAs
Figure 7-23 PCAs
308 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-25 PCAs
4
4
3
3
1
2
Ref
1
5
6
7
Description
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
High-voltage PCA assembly
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (110V-127V)
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (220V-240V)
Control panel-assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Control-panel assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Driver PCA
Cartridge-sensor PCA
Duplexing PCA assembly (duplex models)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n
Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn
Series only (256 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn
Series only (256 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Q5982-69001
Q5982-67908
Q5982-69002
Q5982-67907
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
Q5982-69001
Q5982-67908
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
I controller (formatter), HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only Q5987-67901
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series only Q7725-67903
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3600/3800/
CP3505 Series only
DIMM, 64 MB DDR SDRAM, HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only
Q5982-69002
CB441-67901
CB441-69001
Q7725-67902
Q7800-67951
Part number
RM1-2600-000CN
RM1-2580-000CN
RM1-2578-000CN
RM1-4377-000CN
RM1-4378-000CN
RK2-0996-000CN
RK2-0989-000CN
RM1-2581-000CN
RM1-2585-000CN
RM1-2584-000CN
Q5982-67907
NOTE:
This illustration does not show the relay PCA. See callout 9 in Figure 7-9 Internal components (5 of 5) on page 280 .
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
PCAs 309
500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3)
Figure 7-24 500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3)
310 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
All
14
25
Table 7-26 500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3)
Ref Description
500–sheet feeder and cassette
500–sheet cassette (only), tray 3
Cover, 500-sheet cassette
Separation-pad-holder assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Part number
Q5985–67901
RM1-2732-000CN
RC1-6945-000CN
RM1-2735-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW 500-sheet feeder cassette (tray 3) 311
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
20
Figure 7-25 500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
312 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-27 500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
Ref
All
20
21
22
22A
23
Description
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
Photointerruptor
Cable, option sensor
Sensor, media assembly
Cable, option media sensor (500-sheet feeder)
Paper-pickup-roller assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Part number
RM1-2725-000CN
WG8-5696-000CN
RM1-2625-000CN
RM1-2757-000CN
RM1-2624-000CN
RM1–2727–000CN
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW 500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly 313
500-sheet feeder PCA
1
Figure 7-26 500-sheet feeder PCA
314 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-28 500-sheet feeder PCA
Ref
1
Description
PCA assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Part number
RM1-2583-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 500-sheet feeder PCA 315
Alphabetical parts list
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list
Description
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
500–sheet cassette (only), tray 3
500–sheet feeder and cassette
Arm, switch-link
Block, Multipurpose path (HP CLJ 3000)
Bracket, left, rear
Bushing
Bushing
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, cassette
Cable, clamp
Cable, drive flat 1
Cable, drive flat 2
Cable, drive power
Cable, drum motor
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, duplex docking
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
316 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Part number
RM1-2725-000CN
RM1-2732-000CN
Q5985–67901
RC1-6700-000CN
RC1-7959-000CN
RC1-7551-000CN
RC1-6573-000CN
RC1-6823-000CN
RC1-6517-000CN
RC1-6518-000CN
RM1-2613-000CN
WT2-5944-000CN
RK2-0969-000CN
RK2-0970-000CN
RM1-2605-000CN
RM1-2610-000Cn
RM1-2629-000CN
RM1-2614-000CN
RM1-2609-000CN
RM1-2617-000CN
Table and page
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2616-000CN
RM1-2618-000CN Cable, duplexing sensor (duplex models)
Cable, environment sensor
Cable, ETB
RM1-2595-000CN
RM1-2608-000CN
Cable, fuser drive RM1-2619-000CN
Cable, media sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505)
Cable, memory tag
RM1-2589-000CN
RM1-2627-000CN
Cable, option media sensor (500-sheet feeder)
Cable, option sensor
Cable, panel
Cable, panel connecting
Cable, paper-full
Cable, paper-full (duplex models)
Cable, paper-full (simplex models)
Cable, power control
Cable, scanner
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, scanner flat short
Cable, sensor
Cable, solenoid
RK2-0971-000CN
RK2-0966-000CN
RK2-0967-000CN
RM1-2603-000CN
RM1-2611-000CN
RM1-2624-000CN
RM1-2625-000CN
RM1-2596-000CN
RM1-2587-000CN
RM1-2628-000CN
RM1-2620-000CN
RM1-2630-000CN
RM1-2592-000CN
RM1-2594-000CN
Table and page
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Fuser drive assembly on page 291
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Alphabetical parts list 317
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cam, gear. 48T
Cam, slide, left
Cam, slide, right
Cartridge, guide, right assembly
Cartridge-sensor PCA
Cassette
Part number
RC1-6584-000CN
RC1-6638-000CN
RC1-6645-000CN
RM1-2771-000CN
RM1-2585-000CN
RM1-2702-000CN
Cassette sensor PCA
Cassette, 250-sheet
Connector, snap-tight (simplex models)
Contact-holder assembly
Control panel-assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Control-panel assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cover
Cover, 500-sheet cassette
RM1-2576-000CN
RM1-2705-000CN
VS1-7207-003CN
RM1-2683-000CN
RK2-0996-000CN
RK2-0989-000CN
RC1-7577-000CN
RC1-6945-000CN
Cover, cassette rear left
Cover, cassette rear right (hinge)
RC1-6792-000CN
RC1-6691-000CN
Cover, cassette roller assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) RC1-6609-000CN
Cover, cassette, front
Cover, connector
Cover, crossmember, upper
Cover, gear
Cover, guide crossmember
Cover, left
RC1-6491-000CN
RC1-6607-000CN
RC1-6668-000CN
RC1-6405-000CN
RC1-6795-000CN
RC1-6687-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
PCAs on page 309
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
318 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cover, multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Cover, paper sensor
Cover, rear
Cover, rear lower
Cover, registration sensor
Cover, right
Cover, shutter, left
Cover, slide plate, right
Crossmember, drive side plate
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Developing separation (estrangement) drive assembly
DIMM, 64 MB DDR SDRAM, HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3000: K cartridge only)
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505: K, Y, C, M cartridges; HP CLJ 3000: Y, C, M cartridges only)
Driver PCA
Duct 1
Duct, 2
Duct, 3
Duct, fan
Duplex page, duplex flag
Duplex-output bin full flag
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
Part number
RC1-6690-000CN
RC1-6611-000CN
RC1-6627-000CN
RC1-7550-000CN
RC1-6612-000CN
RM1–2669–000CN
RC1-6651-000CN
RC1-6824-000CN
RC1-7576-000CN
RM1-2600-000CN
RM1-2580-000CN
RM1-2687-000CN
Q7800-67951
RM1-2773-000CN
RM1-2689-000CN
RM1-2581-000CN
RC1-7546-000CN
RC1-7547-000CN
RC1-7548-000CN
RC1-6632-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
RM1-2718-000CN
Table and page
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Developing separation-drive assembly on page 289
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Alphabetical parts list 319
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Duplexing PCA assembly (duplex models)
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
Part number
RM1-2584-000CN
RM1-2721-000CN
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models) RM1-2720-000CN
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Fan
RM1-2752-000CN
RM1-2759-000CN
RM1-2777-020CN
RM1-2750-020CN
RK2-0954-000CN
Fan (duplex models) RK2-0954-000CN
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series only Q7725-67903
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3600/3800/
CP3505 Series only
Flag, developing estrangement (developing separation)
Q7725-67902
RC1-6605-000CN
Foot, rear
Foot, rubber assembly, front
RC1-6650-000CN
RL1-1067-000CN
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n
Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn
Series only (256 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn Series only (256 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69002
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69002
CB441-69001
Q5982-67907
Q5982-67908
Q5982-67907
Table and page
PCAs on page 309
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models) on page 285
Electronic transfer belt
(duplex models) on page 301
Electronic transfer belt
(simplex models) on page 299
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Front-cover assembly (duplex model) on page 271
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
320 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Front-cover assembly (duplex models)
Front-cover assembly (simplex models)
Fuser assembly 110V-127V
Fuser assembly 220V-240V
Fuser cable assembly
Fuser drive assembly
Gear, 17T/41T
Gear, 18T (HP CLJ 3000)
Gear, 19T/30T
Gear, 29T
Gear, 31T
Gear, 41T
Gear, 58T
Guard, cable
Guide, cable, left
Guide, cable, right 1
Guide, cable, right 3
Guide, cable, right 4
Guide, cartridge, left
Guide, cassette front, left
Guide, cassette front, right
Part number
Q5982-67908
CB441-67901
RM1-2715-000CN
RM1-2673-000CN
RM1-2665-000CN
RM1-2743-000CN
RM1-2597-000CN
RM1-2668-000CN
RC1-6596-000CN
RC1-6521-000CN
RC1-6593-000CN
RC1-6575-000CN
RC1-6594-000CN
RC1-6589-000CN
RC1–6571-000CN
RC1-6825-000CN
RC1-6681-000CN
RC1-6682-000CN
RC1-7544-000CN
RC1-7545-000CN
RC1-6629-000CN
RC1-6499-000CN
RC1-6502-000CN
Table and page
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Front-cover assembly (duplex model) on page 271
Front-cover assembly
(simplex model) on page 269
Fuser on page 307
Fuser on page 307
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Fuser drive assembly on page 291
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Alphabetical parts list 321
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Guide, duplexing external (duplex models)
Guide, flexible flat cable 1
Guide, flexible flat cable 2
High-voltage PCA assembly
Holder, drawer
Holder, drawer connector
Holder, ETB, left
Holder, ETB, right
Holder, fan
Holder, toner cartridge
I controller (formatter), HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only
Interlock-switch assembly
Latch, left
Latch, right
Lever lock, left
Lever, lock slide, left
Lever, lock slide, right
Lever, lock, left upper
Lever, lock, right
Lever, sensing
Lift plate activator
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge left
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge right
Part number
RC1-6744-000CN
RC1-6772-000CN
RC1-6773-000CN
RM1-2578-000CN
RC1-6653-000CN
RC1-6652-000CN
RC1-6673-000CN
RC1-6674-000CN
RC1-6631-000CN
RC1-6771-000CN
Q5987-67901
RM1-2670-000CN
RC1-7554-000CN
RC1-7555-000CN
RC1-6633-000CN
RC1-6636-000CN
RC1-6643-000CN
RC1-7618-000CN
RC1-6640-000CN
RC1-7597-000CN
RC1-6833-020CN
RC1-6381-000CN
RC1-6382-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
PCAs on page 309
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
322 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (110V-127V)
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (220V-240V)
Lower guide assembly (duplex models)
Main drive assembly
Part number
RM1-4377-000CN
RM1-4378-000CN
RM1-2722-000CN
RM1-2751-000CN
Media sensor case RC1-6394-000CN
Media-sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) RM1-2756-000CN
Motor, AC 24V, 9W
Motor, DC (ETB) (simplex models)
RK2-0939-000CN
RK2-0937-000CN
Mount, hinge, left
Multipurpose tray (tray 1) extension tray assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Multipurpose tray paper-pickup gear assembly
Multipurpose tray roller (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
RC1-6684-000CN
RM1-2710-000CN
RM1-2711-000CN
RM1-2704-000CN
RM1-2741-000CN
Multipurpose tray separation-pad assembly (HP CLJ
3600/3800/CP3505)
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Paper-pickup drive assembly
Paper-pickup-roller assembly (500-sheet feeder)
PCA assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Photointerruptor
Plate lock release
RM1-2699-000CN
RM1-2774-000CN
RM1-2755-000CN
RM1-2679-000CN
RM1–2727–000CN
RM1-2583-000CN
WG8-5696-000CN
RC1-6833-000CN
Table and page
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Electronic transfer belt
(simplex models) on page 299
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Multipurpose tray assembly
(tray 1) on page 303
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Paper-pickup drive assembly on page 283
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
500-sheet feeder PCA on page 315
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Alphabetical parts list 323
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Plate, gear 3
Position-guide assembly (duplex models)
Pre-registration rachet (HP CLJ 3000)
Preregistration-guide assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3000 only)
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505 only)
Right-rear base assembly
Rod, link, left
Rod, link, right
Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Sensor, media assembly
Sensor, temperature
Separation-pad assembly
Separation-pad-holder assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Shield, PCA
Simplex page-delivery flay
Spring, compression (HP CLJ 3000)
Spring, grounding
Spring, grounding
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
RC1-6646-000CN
RM1-2952-000CN
RM1-2640-000CN
RM1-2757-000CN
WP2-5214-000CN
RM1-2709-000CN
RM1-2735-000CN
RC1-7599-000CN
RC1-6286-000CN
RC1-6520-000CN
RC1-7583-000CN
RC1-6641-000CN
RC1-6383-000CN
RC1-6634-000CN
Part number
RL1-1069-000CN
RM1-2719-000CN
RC1-6444-000CN
RM1-2775-000CN
RM1-2582-000CN
RM1-2632-000CN
RM1-2678-000CN
RC1-6639-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
324 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-29 Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring, tension (HP CLJ 3000)
Top-cover assembly (duplex models)
Top-cover assembly (simplex models)
Torsion spring
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (duplex models)
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (simplex models)
Part number
RC1-6677-000CN
RC1-7552-000CN
RC1-7598-000CN
RC1-6516-000CN
RM1-2713-020CN
RM1-2672-030CN
RC1-7628-000CN
RM1-2714-000CN
RM1-2671-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 325
Numerical parts list
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list
Part number Description
CB441-67901
CB441-69001
Q5982-67907
Q5982-67907
Q5982-67908
Q5982-67908
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69001
Q5982-69002
Q5982-69002
Q5985–67901
Q5987-67901
Q7725-67902
Q7725-67903
Q7800-67951
RC1-6286-000CN
RC1-6381-000CN
RC1-6382-000CN
RC1-6383-000CN
RC1-6394-000CN
RC1-6405-000CN
RC1-6444-000CN
Table and page
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn Series only (256 MB)
Formatter, new, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000 and 3000n
Series only (128 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800 and 3800n printers only (128 MB)
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3000dn and 3000dtn
Series only (256 MB)
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Formatter, exchange, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and 3800dtn printers only (256 MB)
500–sheet feeder and cassette
PCAs on page 309
I controller (formatter), HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3600/3800/
CP3505 Series only
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Firmware, Compact Flash, HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series only
PCAs on page 309
DIMM, 64 MB DDR SDRAM, HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series only
PCAs on page 309
Simplex page-delivery flay
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge left
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Link, multipurpose tray (tray 1) hinge right
Spring, tension
Media sensor case
Cover, gear
Pre-registration rachet (HP CLJ 3000)
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
326 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
RC1-6491-000CN
RC1-6499-000CN
RC1-6502-000CN
RC1-6516-000CN
RC1-6517-000CN
RC1-6518-000CN
RC1-6520-000CN
RC1-6521-000CN
RC1-6573-000CN
RC1-6575-000CN
RC1-6584-000CN
RC1-6589-000CN
RC1-6593-000CN
RC1-6594-000CN
RC1-6596-000CN
RC1-6605-000CN
RC1-6607-000CN
RC1-6609-000CN
RC1-6611-000CN
RC1-6612-000CN
RC1-6627-000CN
RC1-6629-000CN
Description
Cover, cassette, front
Guide, cassette front, left
Guide, cassette front, right
Spring, tension (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing (HP CLJ 3000)
Spring, compression (HP CLJ 3000)
Gear, 18T (HP CLJ 3000)
Bushing
Gear, 29T
Cam, gear. 48T
Gear, 41T
Gear, 19T/30T
Gear, 31T
Gear, 17T/41T
Flag, developing estrangement (developing separation)
Cover, connector
Cover, cassette roller assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cover, paper sensor
Cover, registration sensor
Cover, rear
Guide, cartridge, left
Table and page
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Numerical parts list 327
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-6631-000CN Holder, fan
RC1-6632-000CN
RC1-6633-000CN
RC1-6634-000CN
RC1-6636-000CN
RC1-6638-000CN
RC1-6639-000CN
RC1-6640-000CN
RC1-6641-000CN
RC1-6643-000CN
RC1-6645-000CN
RC1-6646-000CN
RC1-6650-000CN
RC1-6651-000CN
RC1-6652-000CN
RC1-6653-000CN
RC1-6668-000CN
RC1-6673-000CN
RC1-6674-000CN
RC1-6677-000CN
RC1-6681-000CN
RC1-6682-000CN
Duct, fan
Lever lock, left
Spring, tension
Lever, lock slide, left
Cam, slide, left
Rod, link, left
Lever, lock, right
Spring, grounding
Lever, lock slide, right
Cam, slide, right
Rod, link, right
Foot, rear
Cover, shutter, left
Holder, drawer connector
Holder, drawer
Cover, crossmember, upper
Holder, ETB, left
Holder, ETB, right
Spring, tension
Guide, cable, left
Guide, cable, right 1
328 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-6684-000CN Mount, hinge, left
RC1-6687-000CN
RC1-6690-000CN
RC1-6691-000CN
RC1-6700-000CN
RC1-6744-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
RC1-6755-000CN
RC1-6771-000CN
RC1-6772-000CN
RC1-6773-000CN
RC1-6792-000CN
RC1-6795-000CN
RC1-6823-000CN
RC1-6824-000CN
RC1-6825-000CN
RC1-6833-000CN
RC1-6833-020CN
RC1-6945-000CN
RC1-7544-000CN
RC1-7545-000CN
RC1-7546-000CN
Cover, left
Cover, multipurpose tray (tray 1)
Cover, cassette rear right (hinge)
Arm, switch-link
Guide, duplexing external (duplex models)
Duplex page, duplex flag
Duplex-output bin full flag
Holder, toner cartridge
Guide, flexible flat cable 1
Guide, flexible flat cable 2
Cover, cassette rear left
Cover, guide crossmember
Bushing
Cover, slide plate, right
Guard, cable
Plate lock release
Lift plate activator
Cover, 500-sheet cassette
Guide, cable, right 3
Guide, cable, right 4
Duct 1
Table and page
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Numerical parts list 329
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-7547-000CN Duct, 2
RC1-7548-000CN
RC1-7550-000CN
RC1-7551-000CN
RC1-7552-000CN
RC1-7554-000CN
RC1-7555-000CN
RC1-7576-000CN
RC1-7577-000CN
RC1-7583-000CN
RC1-7597-000CN
RC1-7598-000CN
RC1-7599-000CN
RC1-7618-000CN
RC1-7628-000CN
RC1-7959-000CN
RC1–6571-000CN
RK2-0937-000CN
RK2-0939-000CN
RK2-0954-000CN
RK2-0954-000CN
RK2-0966-000CN
Duct, 3
Cover, rear lower
Bracket, left, rear
Spring, tension
Latch, left
Latch, right
Crossmember, drive side plate
Cover
Spring, grounding
Lever, sensing
Spring, tension
Shield, PCA
Lever, lock, left upper
Torsion spring
Block, Multipurpose path (HP CLJ 3000)
Gear, 58T
Motor, DC (ETB) (simplex models)
Motor, AC 24V, 9W
Fan (duplex models)
Fan
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Table and page
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Electronic transfer belt
(simplex models) on page 299
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Front-cover assembly (duplex model) on page 271
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
330 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
RK2-0967-000CN
RK2-0969-000CN
RK2-0970-000CN
RK2-0971-000CN
RK2-0989-000CN
RK2-0996-000CN
RL1-1067-000CN
RL1-1069-000CN
RM1-2576-000CN
RM1-2578-000CN
RM1-2580-000CN
RM1-2581-000CN
RM1-2582-000CN
RM1-2583-000CN
RM1-2584-000CN
RM1-2585-000CN
RM1-2587-000CN
RM1-2589-000CN
RM1-2592-000CN
RM1-2594-000CN
RM1-2595-000CN
RM1-2596-000CN
RM1-2597-000CN
RM1-2600-000CN
RM1-2603-000CN
Description
Cable, scanner flat short
Cable, drive flat 1
Cable, drive flat 2
Cable, scanner flat (long (HP CLJ 3000)
Control-panel assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Control panel-assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Foot, rubber assembly, front
Plate, gear 3
Cassette sensor PCA
High-voltage PCA assembly
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Driver PCA
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3000 only)
PCA assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Duplexing PCA assembly (duplex models)
Cartridge-sensor PCA
Cable, panel connecting
Cable, media sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505)
Cable, power control
Cable, scanner
Cable, environment sensor
Cable, panel
Fuser cable assembly
DC controller PCA assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, sensor
Table and page
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
500-sheet feeder PCA on page 315
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
PCAs on page 309
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Numerical parts list 331
RM1-2617-000CN
RM1-2618-000CN
RM1-2619-000CN
RM1-2620-000CN
RM1-2624-000CN
RM1-2625-000CN
RM1-2627-000CN
RM1-2628-000CN
RM1-2629-000CN
RM1-2630-000CN
RM1-2632-000CN
RM1-2640-000CN
RM1-2665-000CN
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-2605-000CN Cable, drive power
RM1-2608-000CN
RM1-2609-000CN
RM1-2610-000Cn
RM1-2611-000CN
RM1-2613-000CN
RM1-2614-000CN
RM1-2616-000CN
Cable, ETB
Cable, duplex docking
Cable, drum motor
Cable, solenoid
Cable, cassette
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
Cable, duplexing (duplex models)
Cable, duplexing sensor (duplex models)
Cable, fuser drive
Cable, paper-full (duplex models)
Cable, option media sensor (500-sheet feeder)
Cable, option sensor
Cable, memory tag
Cable, paper-full
Cable, drum motor (HP CLJ 3000)
Cable, paper-full (simplex models)
Relay, PCA (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505 only)
Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Fuser assembly 110V-127V
332 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
Fuser drive assembly on page 291
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Fuser on page 307
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-2668-000CN Fuser drive assembly
RM1-2670-000CN
RM1-2671-000CN
RM1-2672-030CN
RM1-2673-000CN
RM1-2678-000CN
RM1-2679-000CN
RM1-2683-000CN
RM1-2687-000CN
RM1-2689-000CN
RM1-2699-000CN
RM1-2702-000CN
Interlock-switch assembly
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (simplex models)
Top-cover assembly (simplex models)
Front-cover assembly (simplex models)
Right-rear base assembly
Paper-pickup drive assembly
Contact-holder assembly
Developing separation (estrangement) drive assembly
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3600/3800/
CP3505: K, Y, C, M cartridges; HP CLJ 3000: Y, C, M cartridges only)
Multipurpose tray separation-pad assembly (HP CLJ
3600/3800/CP3505)
Cassette
RM1-2704-000CN
RM1-2705-000CN
RM1-2709-000CN
RM1-2710-000CN
RM1-2711-000CN
RM1-2713-020CN
RM1-2714-000CN
RM1-2715-000CN
RM1-2718-000CN
Multipurpose tray paper-pickup gear assembly
Cassette, 250-sheet
Separation-pad assembly
Multipurpose tray (tray 1) extension tray assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Top-cover assembly (duplex models)
Upper cover assembly (fuser door) (duplex models)
Front-cover assembly (duplex models)
Duplex-paper feed assembly (duplex models)
Table and page
Fuser drive assembly on page 291
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Front-cover assembly
(simplex model) on page 269
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 277
Paper-pickup drive assembly on page 283
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Developing separation-drive assembly on page 289
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
Cassette (tray 2) on page 293
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
Multipurpose tray assembly
(tray 1) on page 303
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Front-cover assembly (duplex model) on page 271
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Numerical parts list 333
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
RM1-2719-000CN
RM1-2720-000CN
RM1-2721-000CN
RM1-2722-000CN
RM1-2725-000CN
RM1-2732-000CN
RM1-2735-000CN
RM1-2741-000CN
RM1-2743-000CN
RM1-2750-020CN
RM1-2751-000CN
RM1-2752-000CN
RM1-2755-000CN
RM1-2756-000CN
RM1-2757-000CN
RM1-2759-000CN
RM1-2771-000CN
RM1-2773-000CN
RM1-2774-000CN
RM1-2775-000CN
RM1-2777-020CN
Description Table and page
Position-guide assembly (duplex models)
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models)
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models)
Lower guide assembly (duplex models)
500-sheet feeder paper-pickup assembly
500–sheet cassette (only), tray 3
Separation-pad-holder assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Multipurpose tray roller (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Fuser assembly 220V-240V
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
Duplexing-feed drive assembly (duplex models) on page 285
Duplexing reverse-drive assembly (duplex models) on page 287
Duplex-paper feed assembly
(duplex models) on page 305
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
500-sheet feeder cassette
(tray 3) on page 311
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Fuser on page 307
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
Main drive assembly
Electronic transfer belt (duplex models)
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Electronic transfer belt
(duplex models) on page 301
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505) on page 295
Media-sensor cassette assembly (HP CLJ 3600/3800/CP3505)
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Sensor, media assembly
Electronic transfer belt (simplex models)
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Electronic transfer belt
(simplex models) on page 299
Cartridge, guide, right assembly
Drive-motor assembly, print-cartridge (HP CLJ 3000: K cartridge only)
Paper-pickup assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 273
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 275
Preregistration-guide assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Face-down tray assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
Paper-pickup assembly
(HP CLJ 3000) on page 297
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
334 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-30 Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-2952-000CN Scanner assembly (HP CLJ 3000)
RM1-4377-000CN
RM1-4378-000CN
RM1–2669–000CN
RM1–2727–000CN
VS1-7207-003CN
WG8-5696-000CN
WP2-5214-000CN
WT2-5944-000CN
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (110V-127V)
Low-voltage power PCA assembly (220V-240V)
Cover, right
Paper-pickup-roller assembly (500-sheet feeder)
Connector, snap-tight (simplex models)
Photointerruptor
Sensor, temperature
Cable, clamp
Table and page
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
PCAs on page 309
PCAs on page 309
External panels and covers (1 of 2) on page 265
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
External panels, and covers
(2 of 2) on page 267
500-sheet feeder paperpickup assembly on page 313
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 279
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 281
ENWW Numerical parts list 335
336 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
A Printer specifications
●
Electrical specifications
●
Power-consumption specifications
●
Acoustic specifications
●
Operating-environment specifications
ENWW 337
Electrical specifications
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold.
Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.
Table A-1 Electrical specifications for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printers
Item 110-volt models 220-volt models
Power requirements 100 to 127 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
Minimum recommended circuit capacity 6.5 A
220 to 240 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
3.5 A
Table A-2 Electrical specifications for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer
Item 110-volt models 220-volt models
Power requirements 100 to 127 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
Minimum recommended circuit capacity 6.5 A
220 to 240 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
3.5 A
Table A-3 Electrical specifications for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printers
Item 110-volt models 220-volt models
Power requirements 100 to 127 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
Minimum recommended circuit capacity 6.5 A
220 to 240 V (+/-10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
3.5 A
338 Appendix A Printer specifications ENWW
Power-consumption specifications
Table A-4
Power consumption (average, in watts) 1
Product Model Printing
2
Ready
3
Sleep
4
Off Heat output-
Ready (BTU/
hour) 5
HP Color LaserJet 3000 409
HP Color LaserJet 3000n 409
HP Color LaserJet 3000dn 409
HP Color LaserJet
3000dtn
HP Color LaserJet 3600
409
337
HP Color LaserJet 3600n 337
HP Color LaserJet 3600dn 337
HP Color LaserJet 3800 437
29
29
29
29
51
51
51
48
13
13
13
13
15
15
15
15
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
100
100
100
100
171
171
171
162
HP Color LaserJet CP3505
HP Color LaserJet 3800n 437 48 15 0.5
162
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505n
HP Color LaserJet 3800dn 437 48 15 0.5
162
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505dn
HP Color LaserJet
3800dtn
407 46 15 0.7
162
1
2
3
4
5
HP Color LaserJet
CP3505x
The power consumption reflects the highest values measured for color and monochrome printing when using standard voltages.
HP Color LaserJet 3000: The printing speed is 15 ppm for letter-size media and 29 ppm for A4-size media. HP Color
LaserJet 3600: The printing speed is 17 ppm for letter-size media and 17 ppm for A4-size media. HP Color LaserJet 3800 and CP3505: The printing speed is 20 ppm for letter-size media and 21 ppm for A4-size media.
The default activation time from ready mode to sleep mode is 30 minutes.
The recovery time from sleep mode to the start of printing is 6 seconds.
Maximum heat dissipation for all models in ready mode is 171 BTU per hour.
NOTE: These values are subject to change.
ENWW Power-consumption specifications 339
Acoustic specifications
Table A-5 Acoustic emissions for the HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printers
1
Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (15 ppm)
Ready
2
L
WAd
= 6.9 Bels (A) [69 dB (A)]
L
WAd
= 5.3 Bels (A) [53 dB (A)]
Declared per ISO 9296 Sound pressure level: bystander position
Printing (15 ppm) 2
L pAm
= 55 dB (A)
1
2
Ready L pAm
= 39 dB (A)
The HP Color LaserJet 3000dn was tested in simplex mode with A4-size media.
The color printing speed is 15 ppm for letter-size media and A4-size media. The monochrome printing speed is 30 ppm for letter-size media and 29 ppm for A4-size media.
Table A-6 Acoustic emissions for the HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series printer
1
Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (17 ppm) 2
Sound pressure level: bystander position
L
WAd
= 6.4 Bels (A) [64 dB (A)]
Declared per ISO 9296
1
2
Printing (17 ppm) 2
L pAm
= 49 dB (A)
The HP Color LaserJet 3600 printer was tested in simplex monochrome mode with A4-size media.
The printing speed is 17 ppm for letter-size media and 17 ppm for A4-size media.
Table A-7 Acoustic emissions for theHP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printers
1
Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296
Printing (20 ppm)
Ready
2
L
WAd
= 6.4 Bels (A) [64 dB (A)]
L
WAd
= 5.4 Bels (A) [54 dB (A)]
Declared per ISO 9296 Sound pressure level: bystander position
Printing (20 ppm) 2
L pAm
= 50 dB (A)
1
2
Ready L pAm
= 40 dB (A)
The HP Color LaserJet 3800n was tested in simplex mode with A4-size media.
The printing speed is 20 ppm for letter-size media and 21 ppm for A4-size media.
NOTE: These values are subject to change.
340 Appendix A Printer specifications ENWW
Operating-environment specifications
Table A-8 Operating environment specifications
Environment Recommended
Temperature
Humidity
Altitude
17 to 25°C (62.6 to 77°F)
20 to 60% relative humidity (RH)
Not applicable
Allowed
10 to 27°C (50 to 81°F)
10 to 70% RH
0 to 2,600 m (0 to 8,530 ft)
NOTE: These values are subject to change.
ENWW Operating-environment specifications 341
342 Appendix A Printer specifications ENWW
B Product warranty statements
●
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
●
Availability of support and service
●
HP maintenance agreements
ENWW 343
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
HP PRODUCT
HP 3000/3600/3800/CP3505 Series printer
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
1 year, Onsite service
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products might be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products might contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or might have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND
NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/ region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product.
The level of warranty service you receive might vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE,
IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT
TO YOU.
344 Appendix B Product warranty statements ENWW
Availability of support and service
Around the world, HP provides a variety of service and support options for purchase. Availability of these programs will vary depending upon your location.
HP maintenance agreements
Hewlett-Packard Company has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs. Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services vary by location. Contact HP Customer Care to determine the services that are available and for more information about maintenance agreements. In general, the printer will have the following maintenance agreement:
Next-Day Onsite Service
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most onsite agreements (for additional charges).
ENWW Availability of support and service 345
346 Appendix B Product warranty statements ENWW
C Regulatory statements
●
FCC regulations
●
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer)
●
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series and HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer)
●
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer)
●
Safety statements
ENWW 347
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the users authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of
FCC rules.
348 Appendix C Regulatory statements ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer)
Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturers Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model: 3)
HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series
BOISB-0504-01
Including
Product Options:
Print Cartridges:
Q5985A Optional 500 Sheet Input Tray
ALL
Q7560A, Q7561A, Q7562A, Q7563A conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1+A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) GB4943-2001
EMC: CISPR22:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN55022:1994 +A1 +A2 - Class B 1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, these products are assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho 83713, USA
16 May, 2005
For Regulatory Topics Only:
Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street,, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia
European Contact Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, Bblingen, D-71034, Germany, (FAX+49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3000 Series printer) 349
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 3600 Series and HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series printer)
Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturers Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product
Product Names: 4)
Regulatory Model: 3)
HP Color LaserJet 3600 series / HP Color LaserJet 3800 Series
BOISB-0504-00
Including
Product Options:
Print Cartridges:
Q5985A Optional 500 Sheet Input Tray
ALL
Q6470A, Q6471A, Q6472A, Q6473A, Q7581A, Q7582A, Q7583A conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY:
EMC:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR22:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN55022:1994 +A1 +A2 - Class B 1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2) / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, these products are assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
4) CLJ3600 series, CLJ3800 series, and CLJ CP3505 series are similar in design, but use various interface boards.
Boise, Idaho 83713, USA
16 May, 2005
For Regulatory Topics Only:
Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street,, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia
European Contact Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, Bblingen, D-71034, Germany, (FAX +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
350 Appendix C Regulatory statements ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet CP3505
Series printer)
Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product
Product Names: 3)
Regulatory Model: 2)
HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series
BOISB-0504-00
Including
Product Options:
Print Cartridges:
Q5985A - Optional 500 Sheet Input Tray
ALL
Q6470A, Q7581A, Q7582A, Q7583A conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC: CISPR22:2005 / EN55022:2006 - Class B 1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) For regulatory purposes, these products are assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
3) CLJ3600 series and CLJ3800 series are similar in design, but using various interface boards.
Boise, Idaho 83713, USA
February 1, 2007
For Regulatory Topics only, contact:
European Contact Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, Böblingen, D-71034, Germany, (FAX +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet CP3505 Series printer) 351
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1,1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
Conforme la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagntiques. CEM.
EMI statement (Korea)
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord statement (Japan)
352 Appendix C Regulatory statements ENWW
ENWW
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3000n, 3000dn, 3000dtn, 3600, 3600n, 3600dn, 3800, 3800n,
3800dn, 3800dtn, CP3505, CP3505n, CP3505dn, CP3505x, laserkirjoitin on kyttjn kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa kytss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasersteen psyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on mritetty standardin EN
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet 3000, 3000n, 3000dn, 3000dtn, 3600, 3600n, 3600dn, 3800, 3800n,
3800dn, 3800dtn, CP3505, CP3505n, CP3505dn, CP3505x -kirjoittimen sisll ei ole kyttjn huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil. Tllaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota vriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita kyttjn ksikirjassa lueteltuja, kyttjn tehtvksi tarkoitettuja yllpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistykaluja.
VARO !
Mikli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina nkymttmllelasersteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. l katso steeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshlje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion, utsttas anvndaren fr osynlig laserstrlning. Betrakta ej strlen. Tiedot laitteessa kytettvn laserdiodin steilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.
Safety statements 353
354 Appendix C Regulatory statements ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
500–sheet feeder
connector locations 244
driver PCA, removing 166
leftt cover, removing 161
rear cover, removing 164
right cover, removing 159
A
accessibility features 7
acoustic specifications 340
after service checklist 75
agreements, maintenance 345
alerts, e-mail 41
anticounterfeit Web site 34
assembly diagrams 245
B
bad transmission errors 180
bin, output
full message 197
locating 8
black or solid color pages,
troubleshooting 218 blank images, troubleshooting 218
blank spots, troubleshooting 222
box, contents 22
buffer overflow,
troubleshooting 180
buttons, control panel 10
C
calibrating the printer 39
Canadian DOC regulations 352
cartridges
drive motors, removing 101
drum-rotation test 239
features 7
Genuine HP message 191
image-formation system 63
incorrect installation
message 191 install message 191
jam locations 200
life expectancy 34 non-HP 34, 193
operations 69
order message 193
remove all message 196
removing 76
replace message 196
replacement intervals 32
replacing 35
status messages 11
storing 34
supply level, checking 35
testing 233
cassette
capacity 3
jams 203
locating 8
pickup mechanism 57
sensors 56
solenoids 52
checklists
after service 75
pre-troubleshooting 172
preservice 75
chosen personality not
available 189
circuit diagrams 253
classes, HP Technical
Training 259
cleaning stage, image formation
operations 68
cleaning the printer 38
clearing event log 228
clock errors 177
code CRC errors 190
ENWW
cold reset 240
color RFU failed 190
color usage log 40
color, troubleshooting
dark 218
light 216
misregistration 223
missing 221
restricted message 197
reversed 224
solid pages 218
communications,
troubleshooting 227
component test 235
configuration page 40
connector diagrams
500–sheet tray 244
DC controller 250
printer 243
consumables. See supplies
contracts, maintenance 345
control panel
access denied 189
blank, troubleshooting 175
buttons 10
Diagnostics menu 229
display 11 lights 11
locating 8
menu map 40
messages 176
print cartridge supply level,
checking 35
removing 146
Service menu 228
counterfeit supplies 34
covers
500–sheet feeder,
removing 159
Index 355
cleaning 38
front, removing 77
left, removing 86
rear lower, removing 85
rear upper, removing 93
right, removing 89
upper, removing 82
Customer Care Online 259
D
dark color, troubleshooting 218
dark images, troubleshooting 217
date, converting Service ID 242
DC controller
connectors 250
engine control system 50
errors 185
jam detection operations 56
laser/scanner system
operations 54
pickup-and-feed system
operations 55
DC controller PCA, removing 138
Declaration of
Conformity 349, 350
default settings, restoring
cold reset 240
NVRAM initialization 240
demo page 40
developing separation-drive assembly
removing 110
developing stage 66
diagnostics
components 235
disable cartridge check 233
drum-rotation 239
engine test page 238
event log 232
formatter 238 half-self 238
LED 230 mode 230
paper-path sensor 233 paper-path test 233 print quality pages 233
Print/Stop test 237
sensor 234
tests, types of 231
Diagnostics menu 229
diagrams
500–sheet feeder connector
locations 244
assemblies 245
circuit 253
connector locations 243
DC controller connectors 250
timing 251
DIMMs
checking installation 29 enabling 29
failure 193
installing 26
dirt on paper, troubleshooting 219
disable cartridge check 233
disk initialization 241
display, control panel
messages 11
distorted images,
troubleshooting 222
documentation 2
doors, locating 8
dots, troubleshooting 218
downloading software 13
drive assemblies, removing
developing separation 110
duplex-feed 105
duplex-reverse 102
fuser 107
pickup 119
driver PCA, removing 144
drivers
downloading 13
supported 6
drum, image formation
operations 65
drum-rotation test 239
duplex errors 189
duplex fan, removing 98
duplex path jams, clearing 210
duplex-driver PCA, removing 150
duplex-feed-drive assembly
removing 105
duplex-reverse-drive assembly
removing 102
E
e-mail alerts 41
Easy Printer Care Software 16, 44
EIO bad transmission error 181
EIO buffer overflow 180
EIO slot 9
EIO troubleshooting 227
electrical specifications 338
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 72
electrostatic transfer belt (ETB),
removing 96
embedded I/O bad transmission
errors 181
embedded I/O buffer overflow 180
embedded Web server
about 16
e-mail alerts 41
print cartridge supply level,
checking 35
settings 43
using 41
energy specifications 338
Energy Star compliance 7
engine control system 50
engine test page 238
environment for printer
specifications 341
troubleshooting 214
error messages, control
panel 11, 176
ETB (electrostatic transfer belt),
removing 96
ETB separation stage 68
event log
clearing 228
printing 232 viewing 232
F factory defaults, restoring
cold reset 240
NVRAM initialization 240
faded color, troubleshooting 216 faded images, troubleshooting 216
fans, removing
duplex 98
main 132
FCC regulations 348
features
HP Color LaserJet 3000 3, 6
HP Color LaserJet 3600 4, 6
HP Color LaserJet 3800 4, 6
field-replaceable units 72
file directory page 41
356 Index ENWW
Finland, laser safety
statement 353
firmware upgrades,
troubleshooting 190, 191, 197
flowchart, troubleshooting 174
fonts
DIMMs, installing 26
included 6
list, printing 41
formatter
LED 230
resetting counts 228
restoring Service IDrestor 242 service ID 242
testing 238
formatter cage, removing 94
front cover
jams, clearing 208
locating 8
removing 77
fuser
errors 182
install message 191
removing 97
fuser door
jams, clearing 205
removing 82
fuser drive assembly
removing 107
fusing stage 68
fusing, poor 222
G
Genuine HP supplies installed
message 191
guides, printer information 2
H
half-self test 238
hard disk initialization 241
high-voltage power-supply PCA,
removing 140
horizontal lines,
troubleshooting 220
HP Customer Care Online 259
HP Easy Printer Care Software 44
HP Easy Printer Care software 16
HP Jetdirect print server
errors 189
HP Color LaserJet 3000
features 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600
features 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800
features 4
NVRAM initialization 240
troubleshooting 227
HP JetReady 13
HP Printer Utility,
Macintosh 16, 46
HP Technical Training 259
HP Web Jetadmin
downloading 15
e-mail alerts 41
print cartridge level,
checking 35
HP-UX software 15
humidity
specifications 341
troubleshooting 214
I
I/O buffer overflow 180
image defects,
troubleshooting 215
image formation
cleaning stage 68
developing stage 66
fusing stage 68
latent-image stage 65
process 64
systems 63
transfer stage 66
troubleshooting 212
image quality. See print quality, troubleshooting
image transfer stage 67
incorrect supplies error 191 inflate failure 191
initialization
hard-disk 241
NVRAM 240
install cartridge error 191 install fuser error 191
install supplies error 192
installation 22
internal clock errors 177
J jams
cleaning spilled toner 38
control panel messages 179
detection operations 60
duplex path, clearing 210
e-mail alerts 41
front cover, clearing 208
fuser area, clearing 205
locations 200
preventing 201
print quality after 214
recovery 200
tray 1, clearing 202
tray 2 or 3, clearing 203
Japanese VCCI statement 352
Jetadmin, HP Web
downloading 15
print cartridge level,
checking 35
Jetdirect print server
errors 189
HP Color LaserJet 3000
features 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600
features 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800
features 4
NVRAM initialization 240
troubleshooting 227
K
Korean EMI statement 352
L
laser safety statments 352
laser-beam exposure stage 66
laser/scanner assembly,
removing 128
laser/scanner system
operations 54
latent-image formation stage 65
LED diagnostics 230
left cover, removing 86
light color, troubleshooting 216
light diagnostics 230
light images, troubleshooting 216
lights, control panel 11
lines, troubleshooting
dotted 218
ENWW Index 357
horizontal 220 vertical 220
Linux drivers 15
load tray message 192
locked menus, control panel 189
low-voltage power-supply PCA,
removing 134
M
Macintosh
connecting to 25
HP Printer Utility 46
PPDs 16
versions supported 13
main fan, removing 132
maintenance agreements 345
manually feed message 193
manuals 2
media
dirty, troubleshooting 219
duplex path jams 210
front cover jams 208
fuser area jams 205
jam detection operations 60
jam prevention 201
supported sizes 17
transparencies 213
tray 1 jams 202
tray 2 or 3 jams 203
tray operations 56
troubleshooting 212
unexpected size error 181 unexpected type error 181
media feed stage 67
memory
checking installation 29
DIMM failures 193
enabling 29
HP Color LaserJet 3000 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800 4
installing 26
insufficient 180, 192
NVRAM initialization 240
print cartridges 70
RAM errors 185, 195
sanitizing disk message 197
memory-controller PCA,
removing 142
menu map 40
menus locked, control panel 189
messages, control panel 11, 176
misplaced images,
troubleshooting 224
misregistration, color 223
missing color, troubleshooting 221
motors
locations 52
print cartridge, removing 101
multipurpose tray
capacity 3
jams 202
locating 8
pickup and feed operations 58
sensor test 234
solenoids 52
N networks
connecting to 24
HP Color LaserJet 3000
features 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600
features 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800
features 4
HP Jetdirect print server
errors 189
ports, locating 9
software 15
troubleshooting 227
next-day onsite service 345
noise specifications 340
non-HP supplies 34, 176, 193
NVRAM initialization 240
O
on/off switch 9
Online Customer Care, HP 259
onsite service 345
operating systems supported 13
operating-environment
specifications 341
operations
engine control system 50, 51
image-formation system 63
jam detection 60
laser/scanner system 54
motors 52
pickup-and-feed system 55
power-on 51
print cartridges 69
sequence of 50
solenoids 52
trays 56
order supplies message 193
OS/2 drivers 15
output bin
full message 197
locating 8
output quality. See print quality, troubleshooting
P
page count 228
pages per minute
HP Color LaserJet 3000 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800 4
paper
dirty, troubleshooting 219
duplex path jams 210
front cover jams 208
fuser area jams 205
jam detection operations 60
jam locations 200
jam prevention 201
supported sizes 17
tray 1 jams 202
tray 2 or 3 jams 203
tray operations 56
troubleshooting 212
unexpected size error 181 unexpected type error 181
paper-path sensor test 233 paper-path test 233
parallel buffer overflow 180
PCAs, removing
500–sheet feeder driver 166
control panel 146
DC controller 138
driver 144
duplex-driver 150
high-voltage power-supply 140
low-voltage power-supply 134
memory-controller 142
pickup-and-feed driver 148
PCL drivers 13
PCL font list, printing 41
PDL driver 13
358 Index ENWW
permanent storage errors 188
personality not available error 189
photosensitive drum
image formation operations 65
rotation test 239
physical specifications 23
pickup-and-feed assembly,
removing 113
pickup-and-feed driver PCA,
removing 148
pickup-and-feed system
operations 55
pickup-drive assembly
removing 119
pliers, required 73
ports
HP Color LaserJet 3000 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800 4
locating 9
supported 7
power specifications 338
power switch 9
power-on
operations 51
troubleshooting 175
PPDs, Macintosh 16
pre-exposure stage 65
pre-troubleshooting checklist 172
preservice checklist 75
primary charging stage 66
print cartridge drive motors,
removing 101
print cartridges
drum-rotation test 239
features 7
Genuine HP message 191
image-formation system 63
incorrect installation
message 191 install message 191
jam locations 200
life expectancy 34 non-HP 34, 193
operations 69
order message 193
remove all message 196
removing 76
replace message 196
replacement intervals 32
R
RAM errors 185, 195
rear lower cover, removing 85
replacing 35
status messages 11
storing 34
supply level, checking 35
testing 233
print media
supported 17
print quality, troubleshooting
black or solid color pages 218 blank images 218
blank spots 222
color misregistration 223
color missing 221
dark color 218
dark images 217
diagnostic pages 214, 233
dirt on paper 219
distorted images 222
dots in vertical lines 218
environment 214
fusing, poor 222
horizontal lines 220
image defects 215
jams, after 214
light color 216 light images 216
media 212
misplaced images 224
repetitive defects 225
reversed color 224
smearing 223
snail tracks 224
toner buildup 214
transparencies 213
vertical lines 220
white horizontal lines 221
white vertical lines 220
Print/Stop test 237
printing system software 13
processor speed 6
PS Emulation drivers 13
PS font list, printing 41
Q quality. See print quality, troubleshooting
rear upper cover, removing 93
regulatory statement 348
remove all print cartridges
error 196
removing parts
500–sheet feeder 159
about 72
after service checklist 75
control panel 146
DC controller PCA 138
developing separation-drive
assembly 110
driver PCA 144
duplex fan 98
duplex-driver PCA 150
duplex-feed-drive
assembly 105
duplex-reverse-drive
assembly 102
electrostatic transfer belt
(ETB) 96
formatter cage 94
front cover 77
fuser 97
fuser drive assembly 107
high-voltage power-supply
PCA 140
laser/scanner assembly 128
left cover 86
low-voltage power-supply
PCA 134
main fan 132
memory-controller PCA 142
pickup-and-feed assembly 113
pickup-and-feed driver
PCA 148
pickup-drive assembl 119
preservice checklist 75
print cartridge drive motors 101
print cartridges 76
rear lower cover 85
rear upper cover 93
right cover 89
screws, types of 74
service approach 75
tools, required 73
upper cover 82
repair approach 75
replace cartridge message 196
replacement intervals, supplies 32
ENWW Index 359
replacing
field-replaceable units 72
formatter 228
print cartridges 35
resets
cold 240
NVRAM initialization 240
restoring default settings
cold reset 240
NVRAM initialization 240
restricted from printing in color
error 197
reversed color,
troubleshooting 224
RFU loaderror 197
right cover, removing 89
rollers
image formation operations 65
repetitive defects 225
S
safety statements 352
sanitizing disk message 197
schedules, HP Technical
Training 259
screwdrivers, required 73
screws
self-tapping 72
types of 74
sensors
automatic testing 234
jam detection 60
paper-path, testing 233
trays 56
separation stage, image
formation 67
sequence of operations 50
serial buffer overflow 180 serial data errors 180
serial number 228
service agreements 345
service approach 75
service ID 242
Service menu 228
Service menu, PIN 228
setup 22
site requirements 23
size mismatch error 197
smeared print,
troubleshooting 223
snail tracks, troubleshooting 224
software
applications 16
drivers 13
Easy Printer Care 44
embedded Web server 16, 41
HP Easy Printer Care 16
HP Printer Utility for
Macintosh 46
HP Web Jetadmin 15
included 7
network 15
Web sites 13
Solaris software 15
solenoids, locations 52
space requirements 23
specifications
acoustic 340
electrical 338
features 6
operating environment 341
physical 23
speed
HP Color LaserJet 3000 3
HP Color LaserJet 3600 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800 4
static discharge 72
status
e-mail alerts 41
supplies 11
storing print cartridges 34
supplies
anticounterfeit Web site 34
e-mail alerts 41
features 7
Genuine HP message 191
incorrect installation
message 191
install message 192
locating 33
non-HP 34, 176, 193 order message 193
print cartridges, checking
level 35
replace message 196
replacement guidelines 33
replacement intervals 32
status messages 11
supplies status page 40
support, technical 259
supported media 17
switch boxes 227
T
technical support 259
Technical Training 259
temperature
specifications 341
tests
components 235
Diagnostics menu 229
diagnostics mode 230
disable cartridge check 233
drum-rotation 239
engine 238
event log 232
formatter 238 half-self 238
paper-path 233 paper-path sensor 233 print quality 233
Print/Stop 237
sensor 234
types of 231
timing diagrams 251
toner
buildup, troubleshooting 214
cleaning spilled 38
poor fusing 222
smearing 223
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
tools, required 73
top cover
locating 8
removing 82
total page count 228
Training, HP Technical 259
transfer stage 66
transparencies print quality, trays
troubleshooting 213
action not currently available
error 189
configuring 198 empty 198
HP Color LaserJet 3000,
included 3
360 Index ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 3600,
included 4
HP Color LaserJet 3800,
included 4
jams, clearing 202, 203
load message 192
locating 8
manual feed message 193
open 198
optional 6
paper-path test 233
sensors 56
size mismatch error 197
type mismatch error 198
unexpected size errors 181 unexpected type errors 181
troubleshooting
about 172
access denied 189
action not currently available
error 189
assembly diagrams 245
black or solid color pages 218 blank images 218
blank spots 222
buffer overflow 180
cartridges 191, 196
checklist 172
chosen personality not
available error 189
circuit diagrams 253
code CRC error 190
cold reset 240
color misregistration 223
color missing 221
color restrictions 197
communications 227
component test 235
connector locations 243
control-panel messages 176
dark color 218
dark images 217
DC controller connectors 250
DC controller errors 185
Diagnostics menu 229
diagnostics mode 230
DIMMs 193
dirt on paper 219
disable cartridge check 233
distorted images 222
ENWW
dots in vertical lines 218
drum-rotation test 239
duplexer errors 189
EIO cards 227
engine test page 238
environment 214
event log 232
firmware
upgrades 190, 191, 197
flowchart 174
formatter test 238
fuser 191
fusing, poor 222
half-self test 238
horizontal lines 220
HP Jetdirect print server 189
image defects 215
image formation 212
incorrect supplies error 191
internal clock errors 177
jams 200
jams, control panel
messages 179
LED diagnostics 230
light color 216 light images 216
media 212
memory 192
memory errors 180
misplaced images 224
non-HP supplies 193
NVRAM initialization 240
paper-path sensor test 233 paper-path test 233
permanent storage errors 188
power-on 175
print quality diagnostic
pages 214, 233
Print/Stop test 237
RAM 195
RAM errors 185
repetitive defects 225
reversed color 224
sanitizing disk message 197
sensor test 234
serial data errors 180
Service menu 228
size mismatch error 197
smeared print 223
snail tracks 224
supplies 192
timing diagram 251
toner buildup 214
transparencies 213
trays 192, 198
type mismatch error 198
unexpected size error 181 unexpected type error 181
USB storage device failure 199
vertical lines 220
white horizontal lines 221
white vertical lines 220
type mismatch error 198
U
unexpected size error 181 unexpected type error 181
UNIX model scripts 15
upper cover
jams, clearing 205
removing 82
usage page 40
USB I/O buffer overflow 180
USB port
locating 9
Macintosh setup 25
supported 7
Windows setup 24
USB storage device failure 199
V
vacuuming toner 38
vertical lines, troubleshooting
black or colored 220
dotted 218
white 220
voltage specifications 338
W
warranty 344
washing toner off clothing 38
Web sites
anticounterfeit 34
documentation 2
printer features 6
software, downloading 13
supply replacement
guidelines 33
white lines, troubleshooting
horizontal 221
vertical 220
Index 361
Windows
direct connection, setting up 24
versions supported 13
362 Index ENWW
© 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*Q5982-91034*
*Q5982-91034*
Q5982-91034
